Contents

Roland AT500 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 272
1 of 272

Summary of Content for Roland AT500 Owner's Manual PDF

5100001497 08-08-1N * 5 1 0 0 0 0 1 4 9 7 - 0 1 *

AT-500_e.book 1

201b

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (p. 2), USING THE UNIT SAFELY (p. 3), and IMPORTANT NOTES (p. 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owners manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.

202

Copyright 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

AT-500_e.book 2

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions. 2. Keep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follow all instructions. 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. 6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.

BLUE: BROWN:

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

NEUTRAL LIVE

For the U.K.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

2

AT-500_e.book 3

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

Do not disassemble or modify 002a

Do not disassemble or modify this device.

...................................................................................... Do not repair or replace parts 003

Never attempt to repair this device or replace parts. If repair or part replacement should become necessary, you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center.

...................................................................................... Do not use or store in the following types of locations 004

Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are

Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are

Exposed to steam or smoke; or are Subject to salt exposure; or are Humid; or are Exposed to rain; or are Dusty or sandy; or are Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness.

...................................................................................... Do not place in an unstable location 007

Do not place this device on an unstable stand or a tilted surface. You must place it in a stable and level location.

...................................................................................... Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct voltage 008a

You must connect the power cord to an AC outlet of the correct voltage as marked on the device.

......................................................................................

Use only the included power cord 008e

You must use only the power cord included with the device. Do not use the included power cord with any other device.

...................................................................................... Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on it 009

Do not bend the power cord excessively, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Doing so will damage the power cord, and may cause short circuits or faulty connections, possibly resulting in fire or electrical shock.

...................................................................................... Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices 015

Do not connect excessive numbers of electrical devices to a single power outlet. In particular, when using a power strip, exceeding the rated capacity (watts/amps) of the power strip may cause heat to be generated, possibly melting the cable.

...................................................................................... Avoid extended use at high volume 010

This device, either by itself or used in conjunction with headphones, amps, and/or speakers, is capable of producing volume levels that can cause permanent hearing damage. If you experience impaired hearing or ringing in your ears, immedi- ately stop using the device and consult a medical specialist.

...................................................................................... Do not insert foreign objects 011

Never allow foreign objects (flammable objects, coins, wires, etc.) to enter this device. This can cause short circuits or other malfunctions.

......................................................................................

Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.

* Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.

The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power- cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.

3

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

AT-500_e.book 4

Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction occurs 012a

If any of the following should occur, immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer or a service center to have the device serviced. The power cord is damaged The device produces smoke or an unusual smell A foreign object enters the device, or liquid

spills into the device The device becomes wet (by rain, etc.) An abnormality or malfunction occurs in the device

...................................................................................... Do not allow children to use without supervision 013

In households with children, take particular care against tampering. If children are to use this device, they must be supervised or guided by an adult.

...................................................................................... Do not drop or subject to strong impact 014

Do not drop this device or subject it to strong impact.

...................................................................................... Do not use overseas 016

If you wish to use this device overseas, please contact your dealer or a service center.

...................................................................................... Do not use a CD-ROM in an audio CD player or DVD player 023

If you attempt to play back a CD-ROM in a conventional audio CD player or DVD player, the resulting high volume may damage your hearing or your speakers.

...................................................................................... Do not place containers of water on the device 026

Do not place containers of water (such as a flower vase) or drinks on the device. Nor should you place containers of insecticide, perfume, alcoholic liquids, nail polish, or spray cans on the device. Liquids that spill into the device may cause it to malfunction, and may cause short circuits or faulty operation.

......................................................................................

Place in a well ventilated location 101a

When using this device, ensure that it is placed in a well ventilated location.

.......................................................................................................... Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the power cord 102b

When connecting or disconnecting the power cord to/from an AC outlet or the device itself, you must grasp the plug, not the cord.

.......................................................................................................... Periodically wipe the dust off the power cord plug 103a

From time to time, you should unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and use a dry cloth to wipe the dust off of it. You should also unplug the power cord from the AC outlet if you will not be using the device for an extended period of time. Dust or dirt that accumulates between the power cord plug and the AC outlet can cause a short circuit, possibly resulting in fire.

.......................................................................................................... Manage cables for safety 104

Ensure that the connected cables are organized and managed in a safe manner. In particular, place the cables out of reach of children.

.......................................................................................................... Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device 106

Do not stand on this device, or place heavy objects on it.

.......................................................................................................... Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands 107b

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord to the device or AC outlet while holding the power cord plug with wet hands.

.......................................................................................................... Cautions when moving this device 108d

If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. Since this product is very heavy, you must make sure that a sufficient number of people are on hand to help, so you can lift and move it safely, without causing strain. It should be handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage.

1 Check whether the knob bolts fastening the device to its stand have become loose. If they are loose, tighten them firmly.

2 Disconnect the power cord. 3 Disconnect external devices. 5 Close the lid. 6 Remove the music stand. ..........................................................................................................

4

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

AT-500_e.book 5

Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning 109a

Before you clean the device, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.

.......................................................................................................... If there is a possibility of lightning strike, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 110a

If there is a possibility of lightning strike, immedi- ately turn off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.

.......................................................................................................... Cautions when opening/closing the lid 116

Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched (p. 21). Adult super- vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit.

.......................................................................................................... Cautions when using the seat 117: Selection

You must observe the following cautions when using the seat.

1 Do not play with the seat or use it as a stepstool. 2 Do not allow two or more people to sit on the

seat simultaneously. 4 Do not sit on the seat if the bolts fastening the

legs are loose. (If they are loose, use the included tool to retighten them.)

.......................................................................................................... Keep small items out of the reach of children 118b

To prevent small items such as the following from being swallowed accidentally, keep them out of the reach of children. Included items

Music rest attachment screws Screws for assembling the stand Cord clamps Caps Knob bolts

..........................................................................................................

203

* GS ( ) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.

Add

* XGlite ( ) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

220 * All product names mentioned in this document are

trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

5

6

AT-500_e.book 6

Important Notes

Power Supply 301

Do not connect this device to the same electrical outlet as an inverter-controlled device such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, or air conditioner, or a device that contains an electric motor. Depending on how the other device is used, power supply noise could cause this device to malfunction or produce noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, please connect this device via a power supply noise filter.

307

Before you make connections, you must switch off the power on all devices to prevent malfunction and/or speaker damage.

308

Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the Power switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the Power switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cords plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.

Location 351 If this device is placed near devices that contain large

transformers, such as power amps, hum may be induced in this device. If this occurs, move this device farther away or change its orientation.

352a If this device is operated near a television or radio, color

distortion may be seen in the television screen or noise may be heard from the radio. If this occurs, move this device farther away.

352b Keep your cell phone powered off or at a sufficient distance

from this device. If a cell phone is nearby, noise may be heard when a call is received or initiated, or during conversation.

354b

Do not leave this device in direct sunlight, near devices that produce heat, or in a closed-up automobile. Do not allow illumination devices operated in close proximity (such as a piano light) or powerful spotlights to shine on the same location on this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.

355b If you move this device between locations of radically different

temperature or humidity, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the device. Using the device in this condition will cause malfunctions, so please allow several hours for the condensation to disappear before you use the device.

356 Do not allow items made of rubber or vinyl to remain on top of

this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.

358 Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard or

pedal board. This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.

359 Do not affix adhesive labels to this device. The exterior finish

may be damaged when you remove the labels. 360 Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on

which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface.You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.

Care 401b For everyday care, wipe with a soft dry cloth, or remove

stubborn dirt using a tightly wrung-out cloth. If this device contains wooden components, wipe the entire area following the direction of the grain. The finish may be damaged if you continue strongly rubbing a single location.

Addition

If water droplets should adhere to this device, immediately wipe them off using a soft dry cloth.

402 Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, or alcohol, since

these can cause deformation or color change.

Servicing 452

If you return this device for servicing, the contents of memory may be lost. Please store important contents on USB memory, or make a note of the contents. We take utmost care to preserve the contents of memory when performing service, but there may be cases when the stored content cannot be recovered because the memory section has malfunctioned. Please be aware that we cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of lost memory content or for any consequences of such loss.

Other Cautions 551 Stored content may be lost due to a malfunction of the device

or because of inadvertent operation. You should back up important content on USB memory as a safeguard against such loss.

552 We cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of any

content lost from internal memory or USB memory, or for the consequences of such loss.

553 Do not apply excessive force to the buttons, knobs, or input/

output jacks, since this may cause malfunctions. 554 Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. 555 A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during

normal operation. 556 When connecting or disconnecting cables, grasp the plug (not

the cable) to prevent short circuits or broken connections. 557 This device may produce a certain amount of heat, but this is

not a malfunction. 558a Please enjoy your music in ways that do not inconvenience

other people nearby, and pay particular attention to the volume at nighttime. Using headphones will allow you to enjoy music without having to be concerned about others.

559b When transporting or shipping this device, package it in an

appropriate amount of cushioning material. Scratches, damage, or malfunctions may occur if you transport it without appropriate packaging.

560 If using the music rest, do not apply excessive force to it. 562 Some connection cables contain a resistor. Do not connect

such cables to this device. Doing so may make the volume extremely low or inaudible. Please use connection cables not containing a resistor.

565 Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure

that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest Roland Service Center.

566b

The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not function as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location.

Important Notes

AT-500_e.book 7

Add

In order to provide the highest possible image quality, the ATELIER uses a TFT liquid crystal display. Due to the nature of a TFT liquid crystal display, the screen may contain pixels that fail to light or that remain constantly lit, but please be aware that this is not a malfunction or defect.

Floppy Disk Handling (Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive) 651

Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks: Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk. Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas. Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes

(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature range: 1050 degrees C (50122 degrees F).

Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers.

652

Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.

fig.DiskProtect.e.eps

653

The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.

654

Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.

USB Memory Handling 704

When connecting USB memory, firmly insert it all the way in. 705

Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector, or allow them to become dirty.

708

USB memory is made using high-precision electronic components, so please observe the following points when handling it. To prevent damage from static electrical charges,

discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory.

Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object.

Do not bend or drop USB memory, or subject it to strong impact.

Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed-up automobile. (Storage temperature: 050 degrees C)

Do not allow USB memory to become wet. Do not disassemble or modify USB memory.

Addition

When connecting USB memory, position it horizontally with the external memory connector and insert it without using excessive force. The external memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory.

Addition

Do not insert anything other than USB memory (e.g., wire, coins, other types of device) into the external memory connector. Doing so will damage the external memory connector.

Addition

Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory. Addition

If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time, close the USB memory cover.

988

Security Slot ( ) (P.26) http://www.kensington.com/

Handling the CDs (CD-ROMs) Add

When handling the discs, please observe the following. Do not touch the encoded surface of the disc. Do not use in dusty areas. Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed

vehicle. 801

Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner.

Add

Keep the disc in the case. Add

Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time. Add

Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc. Add

Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.

Add

Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind.

Add

Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data, and may further result in malfunction.

Copyright 852

This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy-protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.

853

Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.

Rear side of the disk

Write (can write new data onto disk)

Protect (prevents writing to disk)Write Protect Tab

7

8

AT-500_e.book 8

Main Features

We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland Organ Music ATELIER. The ATELIER is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.

* The AT-500 is abbreviated in this manual as ATELIER respectively.

Basic Concepts of the ATELIER Series

A full complement of organ sounds A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ.

Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models.

High-quality sounds that you can use without editing In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard. You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organno need to perform complicated editing operations.

Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness The piano is indispensable to contemporary music performance. All models of the ATELIER series contain high-quality grand piano sounds that you will enjoy performing. In addition, the range of the lower keyboard has been expanded, giving you greater expressive capabilities on the piano. A damper pedal and initial touch sensitivity are also provided, both necessities for piano performance.

Design utilizes your existing music data The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately. Consideration has been given to data compatibility, and existing song data or Registration data can be moved to USB memory or used by connecting a floppy disk drive.

Music styles from around the world Many of the best-loved musical styles from around the world (Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment patterns) are built in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances.

Utilizes SMF music files Compatible with General MIDI 2, the world standard in SMF music files. Since an external memory connector is provided, you can connect separately available USB memory or a floppy disk drive and take advantage of the wide range of commercially available SMF music files. You can also mute parts, allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.

Main Features

AT-500_e.book 9

Features

Harmonic bars for creating organ sounds The organ is equipped with Harmonic bars, which are much like the controllers used on traditional jazz organs. By operating the harmonic bars, you can easily create a diverse variety of organ sounds. By using the solo harmonic bars you can add orchestral sounds to the organ sounds for even more expressive performance potential.

USB Memory You can connect separately sold USB memory or a floppy disk drive, and play back SMF music files. Performances you record or Registration data you create can also be saved on USB memory or a floppy disk, or you can save SMF music files or Registrations from USB memory or a floppy disk into internal user memory.

Quick Registration and Music Assistant functions The Quick Registration function lets you use keywords to select wonderful Registrations created by top-ranking organists such as Hector Olivera. The Music Assistant function makes it easy to recall appropriate Rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song.

Highly realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment functions All Rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves and subtle nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use Automatic Accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each Rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background.

Human voices and phrases In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER series provides human voices such as Jazz Scat, and human voice phrases such as Amen.

Active Expression sounds For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds. From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.

Harmony Intelligence The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance.

64-note lower keyboard for plenty of range The 64-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ. In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard.

Large, wide LCD For convenience, the frame area of the wide LCD screen always displays buttons for frequently used functions. You can also view the tempo and measure number in any screen. The color liquid-crystal touch panel ensures excellent visibility and easy operability.

9

Main Features

AT-500_e.book 10

This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.

The AT-500 is abbreviated in this manual as ATELIER respectively.

Button names are enclosed in square brackets ([ ]), as in [Drums/SFX] button.

On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets < >, as in .

[] [], [ ] [ ] means that you should press one or the other button. Example: Reverb [] [] buttons, Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons.

For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors.

The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching.

An asterisk (*) or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored.

(p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

Conventions Used in This Manual

NOTE

10

AT-500_e.book 11

Contents

USING THE UNIT SAFELY........................................................................ 3

Important Notes..................................................................................... 6

Main Features........................................................................................ 8 Conventions Used in This Manual .............................................................................10

Panel Descriptions................................................................................ 18

Before You Start Playing ...................................................................... 20 Setting Up the Music Rest..................................................................................................20 Connecting the Speaker Cable ..........................................................................................20 Opening/Closing the Lid ..................................................................................................21 Connecting the Power Cord ..............................................................................................21 Turning the Power On and Off ..........................................................................................22

Turning On the Power .............................................................................................22 Turning Off the Power .............................................................................................22

Using Headphones ..........................................................................................................23 Using a Microphone ........................................................................................................23 Using the Code Hook.......................................................................................................24 Restoring All the Factory Default Settings ............................................................................24 Using the External Memory ...............................................................................................26

Connecting the USB Memory ...................................................................................26 Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive .............................................................................27

Using a CD.....................................................................................................................27 Connecting a CD Drive ...........................................................................................28

About the Display ................................................................................ 29 Understanding the Main and Related Screens ............................................................29

Convenient Functions ........................................................................... 33 Listening to the Demo Songs..............................................................................................33 Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection .............................................................35 Music Assistant Function ...................................................................................................37

Music Assistant Search............................................................................................39 About the Quick Guide Function........................................................................................41

About the Index Menu.............................................................................................42 Creating a Folder ............................................................................................................44

11

Contents

AT-500_e.book 12

Selecting and Playing Sounds............................................................... 46 Selecting Voices ..............................................................................................................46

About the Voices and Parts ......................................................................................46 Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons ...................................47 Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices ......................................................................48 Selecting Pedal Bass Voice ......................................................................................49 Selecting Solo Voice ...............................................................................................50 Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button ...............................................................51

Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ) ...........................................................................53 Playing a Vintage Organ Voice................................................................................55

Performing with an Active Expression Voice ........................................................................59 Performing with a Human Voice ........................................................................................60 Adjust the Volume Balance................................................................................................62 Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)................................................................64 Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)................66

Changing Drums/SFX Sets.......................................................................................67 Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)... 68

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets .......................................................................69 Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold) ..................................................................70

Using Rhythm Performance .................................................................. 71 Selecting a Rhythm...........................................................................................................71

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory ......................................................................72 Rhythm Search .......................................................................................................73

Playing Rhythm................................................................................................................75 Starting at the Press of a Button ................................................................................75 Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start) .76 Stopping the Rhythm ...............................................................................................77

Changing a Rhythms Tempo.............................................................................................77 Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro ...................................................................78 Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment...................................................................78 Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment .................................................79

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation)....................79 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)....................................................80 Leading Bass Function ......................................................................................................82 A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) ..................84 Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory..................................................................................86

Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory ....................................................................86 Copying Rhythms.............................................................................................................87 Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms .........................................................................90 Renaming a Saved Rhythm................................................................................................92 Deleting Saved Rhythm.....................................................................................................94

Using the Registration Buttons .............................................................. 96 Storing Registrations.........................................................................................................97 Recalling a Registration ....................................................................................................98

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) ....................................................................98 How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) ....................................................................98 Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations ..........................................................99

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings .................................................100

12

Contents

AT-500_e.book 13

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set............................................................................101 Saving Registration Sets..................................................................................................103 Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER ................................................106

Loading a Set of Registrations ................................................................................106 Loading an Individual Registration ..........................................................................107

Deleting a Set of Registrations .........................................................................................110 Changing the Name or Order of Registration....................................................................112 Copying Registrations ....................................................................................................114

Using the Performance Functions ........................................................ 117 Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose) .................................................................117 Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound...............................................................................118 Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal) .....................................................................118 Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever ..................................................................................119 Using the Foot Switches ..................................................................................................120

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch ................................................................121 Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations ...........................................................122

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal....................................................123 Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal.............................................................124

Applying Various Effects to the Sound ................................................ 125 Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence) ........................................................125

Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type ................................................................126 Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect).................................................................128

Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed (Rotary Speed)............................129 Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color)........................................130

Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect) ....................................................................131 Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect).................................................................133

Changing the Sustain Length..................................................................................135 Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb Effect).............................................................136

Changing the Reverb Type.....................................................................................137 Changing the Wall Type .......................................................................................138 Changing the Depth of the Reverb ..........................................................................139

Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment .......................................................141 Modifying the Sound.............................................................................................141 Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect................142

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively ................................................. 144 Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard.....................................................................144 Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button) ...............................146

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds.................................................................147 Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice ................................................................147 Changing the Solo Split Point.................................................................................148

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Bass Split) ..............................................149 Changing the Bass Split Point.................................................................................151

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button) ..........................152

13

Contents

AT-500_e.book 14

Recording/Playing Back What You Play ............................................. 153 What is a Track Button? ........................................................................................154 Displaying the Track Buttons ..................................................................................155

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files.....................156 Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute) ............................................................................157

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data..........................................................159 Viewing a Notation .......................................................................................................160

Changing the Notation Settings..............................................................................161 Recording a Performance................................................................................................163 Playing Back a Performance Song ...................................................................................164 Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In)............................................................164 Recording Each Part Separately.......................................................................................165 Re-Recording.................................................................................................................166 Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) ........................................................................167 Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename) .......................................................167 Saving Performance Songs .............................................................................................169 Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER.....................................................................171 Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Favorites or the USB Memory ................................172 Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files ..............................................................173 Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song................................174 Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) ...............................................174 Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording).........................................................175 Starting recording at the right moment (Count-In Recording) ................................................176 Copying Performance Song ............................................................................................177

Editing Your Musical Performance Data .............................................. 179 Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)...................................................................179 Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track) ...............................................................180 Erase Recording (Erase Event) .........................................................................................182 Copying Measures (Copy) ..............................................................................................184 Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize) ............................................................................185

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms ........................................ 187 Preparations for Creating User Rhythms ............................................................................188

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen.................................................................188 Selecting the Division ............................................................................................189 Loading the Rhythm ..............................................................................................190 Making the Division Settings ..................................................................................191

Creating the User Rhythm ...............................................................................................192 Editing the Rhythm ................................................................................................192 Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used ...........................................................195 Deleting Rhythms You Have Created .......................................................................196

Saving the User Rhythm ..................................................................................................196 Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename) ......................................................196 Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory.........................................197

14

Contents

AT-500_e.book 15

Various Other Settings ....................................................................... 198 Adjusting How the Instrument Responds ............................................................................198

Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity .......................................................................198 Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony ......................................................................198

Performance Function Settings .........................................................................................199 Selecting the keyboard affected by the damper pedal ...............................................199 Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal.........................................................199 Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply...........................200 Changing the Pitch Bend Range .............................................................................201 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller .....................................................201

Rhythm Settings .............................................................................................................202 Turning Chord Hold On/Off ..................................................................................202 Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound) ......................................202 Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically...........................................203 Changing the Operation of the Fill In Buttons ...........................................................203

Registration Settings .......................................................................................................205 Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled ..................................205 Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled.............................205

Composer Settings .........................................................................................................206 Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off ................................................................206 Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Playback Transpose)............................206 Changing the Metronome Setting ...........................................................................207 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ...........................................................................207 Changing the Sound of the Metronome ...................................................................208 Setting the Beat ....................................................................................................208 Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back ...............................................................209 Adjusting the timing of a player piano CDs piano sound and accompaniment ............210

Other Settings ...............................................................................................................210 Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)...................................................................210 Adjusting the Mic Echo .........................................................................................211 Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers ....................................................................211 Setting the PC Number..........................................................................................212 MIDI IN Mode......................................................................................................212 Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel .......................................................................213 Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen..................................................214 Switching the Background of the Main Screen..........................................................214 Using the V-LINK function ......................................................................................215 Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER's Screen on a Display........................................216 Repositioning the Touch Screen ..............................................................................217

Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings.................................................218 Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings ...............219 Formatting a USB Memory (Format)..................................................................................220 Displaying a Graphic at Power-up ...................................................................................220

Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory...........................................................222 Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory.............................................................223 Video-related Settings.....................................................................................................224

Selecting the Type of Slide Show............................................................................224 Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change ...................................................225

15

Contents

AT-500_e.book 16

Connecting with External Device......................................................... 227 Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors ....................................................................227 Connecting to Audio Equipment ......................................................................................228 Connecting a Computer..................................................................................................229

Making the Settings for the USB Driver ....................................................................230 Connecting MIDI Devices................................................................................................231 Connecting an External Display .......................................................................................232

Enjoying Music and Video.................................................................. 233 Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs .........................................................................................234

Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song ...........................................................................234 Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays .........................................................236 Performing with Sounds that Match the Song (Recommended Tones) ..........................................................................................238

Listening to Songs from Music CD ....................................................................................239 Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel) .................................................240

Appendices Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................241 Error Message...............................................................................................................248 Chord List .....................................................................................................................249 Glossary.......................................................................................................................251 Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use...............................................................................252

The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files..........................................252 About the ATELIER Sound Generator .......................................................................252

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off........................................................253 Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off ..............................................253 Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons ...................................................253 Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons.....................................253

MIDI Implementation Chart .............................................................................................254 Demo Song List..............................................................................................................255 Short Cut List .................................................................................................................257 Main Specifications .......................................................................................................258 Index............................................................................................................................260

16

AT-500_e.book 17

MEMO

17

18

AT-500_e.book 18

Panel Descriptions

1. Part Balance [] [] buttons p. 62 2. Pedal Bass Voice select buttons p. 49

[Alternate] button [To Lower] button p. 152 Level [] [] buttons p. 62

3. Lower Voice select buttons p. 48 Lower Organ Part Lower Orchestral Part [Alternate] button Level [] [] buttons p. 62

4. Touch Screen p. 29

5. [Harmony Intelligence] button p. 125

6. Upper Voice select buttons p. 48 Upper Organ Part Upper Orchestral Part [Alternate] button Level [] [] buttons p. 62

7. Solo Voice select buttons p. 50 Solo Part [Alternate] button [To Lower] button p. 146 Level [] [] buttons p. 62

8. [Power On] switch p. 22

9. D Beam p. 141, p. 142

10. D Beam buttons p. 141, p. 142

11. Upper Harmonic Bars p. 53

12. Solo Harmonic Bars p. 53, p. 62

13. Vintage Organ buttons p. 53

14. Percussion buttons p. 56

15. [H-Bar Manual] button p. 57

16. [Video Monitor] button p. 237

17. [Value] dial p. 32

18. Pedal Harmonic Bars p. 53

19. Lower Harmonic Bars p. 53

20. Transpose [-] [+] buttons p. 117

1 2

109 8

3

4

11

25

23

22

24

28

29 2726

12 1413 15 16 17

30

Panel Descriptions

P anel D

escriptions

1

AT-500_e.book 19

21. Composer p. 153 [Song] button [Registration] button p. 99p. 114 [Demo] button p. 33 [Reset] button [Play/Stop] button [Rec] button p. 163

22. [Drums/SFX] button p. 66

23. [Manual Percussion] button p. 68

24. Rhythm select buttons p. 71 Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons p. 77 Fill In [Auto] button p. 79 Fill In [Break] button p. 79 Variation buttons p. 79 [Intro/Ending] button p. 75p. 77 [Count Down] button p. 78 Arranger [On/Off] button p. 78 [One Touch Program] button p. 84 [Sync Start] button p. 76 [Start/Stop] button p. 75p. 77

25. [Pedal Sustain] button p. 133

26. [Master Volume] slider p. 22

27. [Brilliance] slider p. 118

28. Pitch Bender/Vibrato lever p. 119

29. Rotary Sound p. 128 [On/Off] button [Fast/Slow] button

30. Registration buttons [Write] button p. 97 [Manual] button p. 100 Registration [1][8] buttons p. 96

6

5

7

8 19

2120

19

20

AT-500_e.book 20

Before You Start Playing

Attaching the Music Rest

1. Insert the supplied screws for the music rest into the screw holes located on the top of the instrument, and lightly tighten them (two locations).

2. Put the music rest between the screws and the ATELIERs body.

3. While supporting the music rest with one hand, secure it in place by turning the screws. When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you dont drop it. Be careful, so you dont get your fingers pinched.

Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest.

Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music rest.

Before moving the organ, be sure to remove the music rest to prevent accidents.

Removing the Music Rest

1. To remove the music rest, support it with one hand while loosening the screws.

2. Remove the music rest. After removing the music rest, dont forget to retighten the screws.

1. Plug the speaker cable extending from the stand into the Speaker connector located at the rear of the AT-500s bottom panel. Pay attention to the shape of the speaker cables connector, and insert it until you hear it click securely into place.

Setting Up the Music Rest

Screw

Screw

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

Connecting the Speaker Cable

Speaker Cord

Organ side

Speaker box side

Before You Start Playing

B efore Y

ou S tart P

laying

AT-500_e.book 21

fig.00-22.eps

1. To open the lid, hold it with both hands and slide it to the rear.

2. To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it stops.

Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when small children are going to be using the instrument.

To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving the organ.

Make sure you dont have anything (such as sheet music) on the keyboard when you close the lid.

1. First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at the panels left side is OFF (not pushed in).

fig. 00-27.eps,fig.00-27-2.eps

2. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC Inlet connector, then plug the other end into an AC outlet.

Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument.

Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the AC outlet.

Opening/Closing the Lid

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

Connecting the Power Cord

OFF

Upper position

Power Cord

AC Outlet

NOTE

NOTE

21

Before You Start Playing

AT-500_e.book 22

941

Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on or off devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

1. Make sure of the following before the power is turned on.

Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet?

Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet?

Is the [Master Volume] slider (located at the left of the Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position?

fig.00-26.eps

2. Press the [Power On] switch to turn on the power.

fig. 00-27.eps, fig.00-27-3.eps

The main screen will appear in the display.

942

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

3. Adjust the volume to an appropriate level by moving the [Master Volume] slider or operating the expression pedal. Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable level. The volume will be increased when the Expression Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal is returned.

fig.00-28.eps

1. Before switching the power off, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (minimum) position.

2. Press the [Power On] switch to turn off the power.

fig. 00-27.eps,fig.00-27-2.eps

945

If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the [Power On] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).

Turning the Power On and Off

Turning On the Power

NOTE

ON

Lower position

Main Screen

NOTE

Turning Off the Power

increase the volume

decrease the volume

increase the volume

decrease the volume

OFF

Upper position

NOTE

22

Before You Start Playing

B efore Y

ou S tart P

laying

AT-500_e.book 23

The ATELIER features Phones jacks. These allow you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you, even at night. fig.00-29.eps

1. Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard. The sound from the built-in speakers stops. Now, sound is heard only through the headphones.

2. Adjust the headphones volume with the [Master Volume] slider and Expression pedal.

Some Notes on Using Headphones fifig.00-31.eps

To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug.

Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the ATELIER before plugging in headphones.

To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or damage to the headphones, the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.

Accepts connection of Stereo headphones.

If plugs of the headphones are plugged into the [Phones] jack, no sound will be heard from the ATELIERs speakers.

Since this instrument has a Mic jack, you can use a microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance, or singing along with SMF music files (sold separately). fig.00-32.eps

1. Connect your microphone to the [Mic] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.

2. Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the volume level for the microphone.

You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from the microphone (p. 211).

The microphone must be purchased separately. When purchasing a microphone, please consult the vender where you bought the ATELIER.

Some Notes on Using a Microphone fig.00-31.eps

To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning.

When connecting a microphone to the ATELIER, be sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers.

Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by: Changing the orientation of the microphone. Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the

speakers. Lowering volume levels.

Using Headphones Using a Microphone

23

Before You Start Playing

AT-500_e.book 24

If youre using headphones or a microphone, you can use the cord hook to neatly bundle the cables near your feet.

Attaching the Cord Hook

1. Screw the cord hook (with wing nut) about 80% of the way into the screw hole located at the bottom left of the organ.

2. After youve oriented the hook as desired, use the wing nut to fasten it.

You can restore all of the settings stored in the ATELIER to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory. This function is called Factory Reset.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

fig.00-37.eps

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

fig.00-38.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . fig.00-39.eps

Using the Cord Hook

Screw Hole

Wing Nut

Cord Hook

Restoring All the Factory Default Settings

24

Before You Start Playing

B efore Y

ou S tart P

laying

AT-500_e.book 25

The confirmation message appears on screen. fig.00-40-1.eps

If you touch , the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

4. When you touch , the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress! fig.00-40-2.eps

Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations currently in the memory of the ATELIER. To save the Registrations you are currently using, refer to Saving Registration Sets (p. 103).

If you want to restore settings other than those for User Memory (p. 72) to the factory-set condition, touch in the System Utility screen. If you want to restore only the user memory to the factory-set condition, refer to page 218.

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

You can also use the following method to return to the factory-set condition.

Method 1

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [One Touch Program] button. The confirmation message appears on screen.

fig.00-40-1.eps

If you touch , the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the Main screen.

3. When you touch , the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

Method 2

1. Turn down the volume to the minimum level, then turn off the power.

2. While holding down the [One Touch Program] button, press the [Power On] switch to turn the power on.

fig.00-41.eps

The following screen appears. fig.00-40-3.eps

25

Before You Start Playing

AT-500_e.book 26

Songs you record on the ATELIER and Registration sets you create can be copied to separately available USB memory for safekeeping. You can also copy songs to a floppy disk using a separately sold floppy disk drive (p. 87, p. 114, p. 177). You can also play back SMF music files saved on USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 156).

Use USB memory and floppy disk drive available from Roland. Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if other USB device is used.

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

931

Carefully insert the USB memory all the way inuntil it is firmly in place.

If youre using new USB memory or floppy disk, youll need to initialize (format) it on the ATELIER. For details, refer to Formatting a USB Memory (Format) (p. 220).

Rotating the External Memory Connector Holder

The External Memory connector holder rotates 90 degrees left and right. Rotating the External Memory connector holder allows you to avoid damaging the connected external memory if something happens to bump against it.

1. Grasp the External Memory connector holder and turn it 90 degrees to the left or right.

Be sure to grasp the External Memory connector holder itself when rotating it. Never rotate the External Memory connector holder by holding the connected external memory.

Take care not to allow your fingers to become pinched when rotating the External Memory connector holder.

988 Security Slot ( ) http://www.kensington.com/

Using the External Memory

Connecting the USB Memory

NOTE

External Memory Holder

90 degrees to the right

90 degrees to the left Security Slot

NOTE

NOTE

26

Before You Start Playing

B efore Y

ou S tart P

laying

AT-500_e.book 27

Attach the floppy disk drive as shown the figure, using the mounting holes on the ATELIERs bottom panel.

For details of the attachment, refer to the owners manual of the floppy disk drive.

1. Connect the USB cable of the floppy disk drive to the ATELIERs Ext Drive connector.

Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive

Ext Drive Connector

USB Cable

27

Before You Start Playing

AT-500_e.book 28

You can play back audio CDs and CD-ROMs containing saved SMF music files.

You can also play songs on VIMA CD-ROMs (VIMA TUNES) sold by Roland.

Precautions Concerning Use of the CD

The ATELIER is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards-those that carry the COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO logo.

The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs cannot be guaranteed.

For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs, please consult the disc vendor.

You cannot save songs to CDs, and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you cannot format CDs.

CD drives that draw their power from the USB connector cannot be used.

1. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the CD drive to be connected.

2. Connect the USB cable included with the CD drive to the Ext Drive connector on the ATELIER.

3. Turn on the power to the ATELIER.

4. Turn on the power to the connected CD drive.

For information on how to perform the following CD-drive operations, refer to the owners manual for the drive. Switching the power on and off Inserting and ejecting a CD

A list of the CD drives that have been tested and found to be compatible is available on the Roland website.

http://www.roland.com/

Using a CD Connecting a CD Drive

NOTE

Ext Drive Connector

USB Cable

NOTE

28

AT-500_e.book 29

About the Display

A bout the D

isplay

The ATELIER makes use of a Touch Screen.

This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly.

Main Screen fig.00-06-a.eps

Understanding the Main and Related Screens

Number Description

1 Bouncing Ball A ball will bounce in time with the Rhythm or song.

2 Beat

3 Transpose Displays the keyboard transposition setting.

4 Chord Name Displays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard.

5

Indication button Pressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm Name, Song Name, or Registration Name. The name of the Rhythm will appear in the screen when you turn on the power. You can change this indication to the song name or the Registration name.

6 Rhythm Name/Song Name/Registration Name

7 Quick Registration Press this when you want to use the Quick Registration function (p. 35).

8 Music Assistant Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 37).

985

NOTE

The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.

NOTE

The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the Touch Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen.

NOTE

The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in Repositioning the Touch Screen (p. 217) to correct the pointer position.

You can make settings so that the bouncing ball is not shown in the main screen (p. 214), and change the background of the main screen (p. 214).

7

8

15 14

16

13

17

6 5

1 2 3 4

11109

12

NOTE

Do not place items on the touch screen.

29

About the Display

AT-500_e.book 30

9

Rhythm You can play Rhythms from this instrument, or play or store Rhythms from USB memory or user memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here.

10 System Make various settings.

11

Quick Guide Displays the Quick Guide screen. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen (p. 41).

12 Tempo

13 Measure

14 Sound/KBD (Sound/Keyboard) Select a voice (tone), or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc.

15 Rec/Play Play back or record a song. You can also view a notation display while a song plays.

16 Registration Load Registrations from user memory into internal memory, or save Registrations. Registration-related settings can also be made here.

17 Main Returns you to the main screen if any screen other than the main screen is open.

This icon is displayed when the V-LINK function is on. V-LINK function (p. 215)

This icon is shown for SMF music files.

This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered. This icon is also shown if youve recorded a song but not yet saved it.

Number Description

Tempo, measure number, , , , and

are always shown in the right side of the screen.

30

About the Display

A bout the D

isplay

AT-500_e.book 31

About the Icons fig.09-08.eps, fig.03-05.eps

Sub-windows

When you touch or the like in a screen, a screen like the following will appear. This type of screen is called a sub-window.

fig.00-38.eps

Button Meaning

Depending on the function, some screens are spread over

multiple pages.

You can touch < > < > < > < > to display

the next or previous page of the screen.

In the Load screen, Save screen, or File Edit screen, you can

select a file by touching < > < >.

Touch this when you want to exit (close) the currently displayed screen.

This icon is shown for Active Expression voice. Active Expression Voice (p. 59)

This icon is shown for EX voice. Ex Voice (p. 51)

You can return directly to the main screen by touching

shown in the right side of the screen.

When you touch a menu in the sub-window, the sub-window will close, and the selected menu screen will appear.

In a sub-window, touch to exit the sub-window.

31

About the Display

AT-500_e.book 32

Sub-windows for Setting Values

When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of screen appears.

fig.09-09.eps

About the [Value] Dial

The ATELIER has a [Value] dial. You can use the [Value] dial to change the tempo or edit the settings, or to select a file in screens such as the File Edit screen.

Editing the value of a setting (when a sub-window for editing the value is open)

Switching files (when the File Edit screen, Save screen, or Load screen for Rhythms, songs, or Registrations is open)

Return to the factory settings.

Modify the value.

If a sub-window for you to edit the settings is shown, you can use the [Value] dial to switch the settings.

32

AT-500_e.book 33

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

The ATELIER provides demo songs. Heres how to play the Demo songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the ATELIER.

fig.01-01.eps

1. Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light. The Demo Screen appears.

fig.01-03.eps

2. Touch < > or < > on screen to select the demo song. fig.01-03.eps

3. Touch < > to start playback of the demo song. When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.

Listening to the Demo Songs

For details on the composer of each demo song and their profiles, refer to Demo Song List (p. 255).

You can play/stop the demo songs by pressing the panel [Play/Stop] button.

33

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 34

4. Touch < > once again to stop playback of the demo song.

5. Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.

If the following screen appears

If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to the Favorites (User memory) or USB memory, the following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs.

fig.E-62.eps

If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch .

1. If you want to delete the performance data, touch .

The performance data can be saved on the Favorites (User memory) or USB memory. If you wish to save the performance data to the Favorites or USB memory, refer to Saving Performance Songs (p. 169).

NOTE

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

NOTE

The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector.

34

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 35

You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can call up Registrations created by top-level organists, and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own Registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The Quick Registration screen appears. fig.03-32.eps

2. Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group. fig.03-32.eps

Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

35

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 36

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a Quick Registration group. fig.03-35.eps

3. In the sub-window, touch a Quick Registration group name to select the desired Quick Registration group. The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display.

4. Touch , , or , switching the respective buttons indicator on or off, to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned.

fig.03-32.eps

5. Touch < > < > to switch pages, and touch the desired keyword. The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard.

If you want to continue changing the voice settings, repeat steps 2--5.

Setting Keyboard for which you select a voice

Upper Upper keyboard

Lower Lower keyboard

Pedal Pedalboard

36

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 37

A collection of the worlds best, most well-known songs were carefully selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument. Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind, and a Rhythm performance, a sound for the melody, and other selections will be made for you. Once youve selected a keyword, all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The Music Assistant screen appears. fig.00-18.eps

Music Assistant Function

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

37

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 38

2. Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a keyword appropriate for the character of the song.

fig.00-19.eps

The Registration [1][4] buttons flash.

Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration [1][4] buttons.

3. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord. At the moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

4. Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the panel settings.

5. Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the Rhythm.

6. To end the Music Assistant function, press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.

You can also switch screens by using the [Value] dial.

38

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 39

You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a Music Assistant search.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Music Assistant screen appears.

fig.00-18.eps

2. Touch . A sub-window appears.

fig.00-19-2.eps

Searching by Music Assistant Name

3. Touch . fig.00-19-3.eps

Music Assistant Search

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

39

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 40

4. Decide which character you will use for the search. Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABC...).

Touch to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

5. Touch (Start Search). The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

6. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant. Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

Searching by Conditions

3. Touch . You can use four different criteria in searches: Tempo, Rhythm, Genre, and Scene.

fig.00-19-4.eps

4. Touch the value for the search term.

5. Touch < > < > to adjust the settings.

6. Touch .

7. Touch (Start Search). The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

8. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant. Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

If you dont need to specify any search conditions, choose Any.

40

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 41

The ATELIER offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The following Quick Guide screen appears.

fig.00-13.eps

2. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch. You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.

3. Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.

4. When you are finished making settings, touch to close the screen.

About the Quick Guide Function

For more on keys, buttons, and controllers that can be used with the Quick Guide function, refer to Short Cut List (p. 257).

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

41

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 42

In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch to access the Index Menu. In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The following Quick Guide screen appears.

fig.00-13.eps

2. Touch . The following screen appears.

fig.00-14.eps

3. Touch a letter of the alphabet to select the first letter of the desired keyword.

fig.00-15.eps

About the Index Menu

42

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 43

The Quick Guide Index screen appears, and the keywords will be displayed. fig.00-16.eps

4. Touch the desired keyword. fig.00-16.eps

The setting screen for the specified keyword appears.

5. Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.

6. Touch .

43

Convenient Functions

AT-500_e.book 44

\

You can create folders in a connected USB memory device or in user memory (Favorites).

If you want to create a folder in USB memory, connect the USB memory to the external memory connector.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

2. Touch . The Registration File Edit screen appears.

fig.03-25.eps

Creating a Folder NOTE

You cant create a folder on a floppy disk.

About folders The ATELIER lets you create up to 99 Registration sets or songs. If you create a folder, youll be able to save up to 99 Registration sets or songs in each folder. You can create as many folders as you wish, limited only by the capacity of the media. Its a good idea to save the Registrations in a folder for each song.

44

Convenient Functions

C onvenient F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 45

3. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose Ext Memory if you want to create a folder on USB memory or User if you want to create a folder user memory.

4. Touch . A screen will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the new folder.

5. Assign a name to the folder. Touch the screen to specify the desired characters.

Rename the folder as described in Assigning a Name to a Registration Set (p. 101).

6. When youve finished, touch . A new folder with the name you assigned will be created.

NOTE

Only lowercase letters and the _ (underscore) character can be used in a folder name.

NOTE

You cant create a folder that has the same name as an already-existing folder.

Creating a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen Heres how to create a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch .

The Song Select screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Song File Edit screen appears.

5. Touch < > < > to select the media.

Choose Favorites if you want to create a folder in Favorites or Ext Memory if you want to create a folder in USB memory.

6. Carry out steps 4 through 6 of Creating a Folder (p. 45).

45

46

AT-500_e.book 46

Selecting and Playing Sounds

You can play the sounds of various instruments on the ATELIER. These sounds are called Voices.

The ATELIER has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard. From top to bottom these are called the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard, and Pedalboard.

fig.01-05-2.eps

Three parts, Organ, Orchestral and Vintage Organ are assigned to the Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice from each part. Plus, with the addition of the Solo part voice, you can have up to Four voices playing simultaneously (the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard). The Pedalboard has two parts: Pedal and Vintage Organ. You can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to two voices simultaneously.

Selecting Voices

About the Voices and Parts

Keyboard Parts

Upper Keyboard

Upper Organ Upper Orchestral Upper Vintage Solo (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button be extinguished)

Lower Keyboard

Lower Organ Lower Orchestral Lower Vintage Solo (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button lights up)

Pedalboard Pedal Pedal Vintage

Pedalboard

Lower Keyboard

Upper Keyboard

To play a Solo voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Solo voice and press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 146).

If you want to play the pedal bass voice in the lower keyboard, set Bass Split to ON. (p. 149)

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 47

fig.01-06.eps

Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.

Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them.

The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices.

Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons

[Alternate] button Voice that will be selected

Lit The voice indicated on the button is selected.

Unlit

Another voice of the same category as the voice shown on the button will be selected. For buttons to which voices of the same category are not assigned, the voice printed below the button will be selected.

NOTE

No sounds are produced, even when the keys are played, when the Voice button is unlit and all vintage organ voices are off.

47

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 48

Press the Organ or Orchestral buttons for each Keyboard (Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice.

When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play Full Organ1 and the Lower keyboard will play Lower Organ3.

Example: Selecting ComboJazzOrg for the Upper Organ and Grand Piano for the Upper Orchestral.

1. Press the Upper Organ [Jazz] button (indicator lights). The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

fig.01-08.eps

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the Jazz Organ2 will sound.

2. Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button (the indicator lights). When you play the Upper keyboard, the ComboJazzOrg will sound.

Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button.

3. Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button (the indicator lights). When you play the Upper keyboard, Grand Piano will be added, producing a mixture of two different voices.

Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices

The lower voice can be selected in the same way as the upper voice.

48

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 49

Press the buttons of the various parts of Pedal to select voices.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the Organ Bass1 voice.

Example: Select Str.Bass Pdl for the Pedal part fig.01-09.eps

1. Press the Pedal [String] button (indicator lights). The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

fig.01-10.eps

Now when you play the Pedalboard, Str.Bass Pdl (String Bass Pedal) will be heard.

Selecting Pedal Bass Voice

1

Normally, playing the pedalboard will sound one note at a time. Settings can be adjusted to allow multiple notes to be played on the Pedalboard (p. 198).

If you press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights) or Bass Split is ON, the Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard, not by the Pedalboard. For details refer to Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Bass Split) (p. 149) or Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button) (p. 152).

49

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 50

The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard. This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest (solo) note.

Example: Selecting Trumpet for the Solo part

fig.01-11.eps

1. Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights). The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

fig.01-12.eps

Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note played.

When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the button will alternate.

Selecting Solo Voice

1

You can use the Solo parts harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part (p. 62).

By pressing the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the Solo voice from the Lower keyboard. For details refer to Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button) (p. 146).

It is possible to change how a Solo voice will sound. Normally, the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard, but you can make settings so that the last-played note will sound the Solo voice. For details, refer to Changing How the Solo Voice Responds (p. 147).

50

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 51

Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others] button, you can select all voices.

As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two voices. You can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark). The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice. The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

fig.01-15.eps

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group. fig.01-15.eps

Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button

A voice indicated by is called an EX voice. These voices are especially recommended.

NOTE

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

Sounds marked by

support the Active Expression function (p. 59).

51

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 52

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group. fig.01-16.eps

4. In the sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the desired sound group. The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound group.

fig.01-17.eps

5. Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a voice name to select a voice.

6. Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm the voice. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

You can touch in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed. Active Expression voices can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal part, and Solo part. For more on the active expression voices, refer to Performing with an Active Expression Voice (p. 59).

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

52

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 53

The Vintage Organ button lets you add the vintage organ sounds to the upper, lower, and pedal parts.

In addition, you can also use the harmonic bars to modify the selected sound as desired.

The ATELIER provides nine harmonic bars for the upper part and lower part respectively, and two harmonic bars for the pedal part.

Each harmonic bar is assigned a sound of a different footage (pitch), and by layering these sounds you can create a variety of organ tones.

Harmonic Bar

By sliding the harmonic bars forward or backward (in or out), you can adjust the volume of the various footages. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (08). When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound. 8 is the footage that forms the basic pitch of the sound; this is the center around which you create the tone. Each harmonic bar is assigned a sine wave (a pure pitch without overtones) of a different pitch, and by combining these pitches you can create a wide range of sounds.

Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ)

You can use the Solo parts harmonic bars to adjust the volume of the Solo part voice.

Time

Time

Time

8' volume: 8

4' volume: 5

53

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 54

Whats the feet?

Feet is a term that began as a measurement of the length of the pipes in a pipe organ. The pipes that produce the basic pitch (fundamental) for each note are considered to be 8 feet in length. Therefore, a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8' (eight feet) would be 16'; for one octave above the reference, the pipe would be 4', and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2'. The pitches of the harmonic bars are related as follows.

On tonewheel organs, the high-pitched footage for a portion of the high range, and the low-pitched footage for a portion of the low range are folded-back in units of one octave. Folding back the high-frequency portion prevents the high-frequency sounds from being unpleasantly shrill, and folding back the low-frequency portion prevents the sound from becoming muddy. On the ATELIER faithfully simulates this characteristic.

16' 8' 4' 2' 1'51/3' 22/3' 13/5' 11/3'

one octave below

5th root 8th 12th 15th 17th 19th 22nd

8' =

When the middle C (C4) note is pressed, each harmonic bar will sound the following notes.

54

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 55

Turning on Vintage Organ

1. Press the Vintage Organ [On/Off] button so its indicator is lit. Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF.

The Vintage organ screen appears.

Modifying the Sound

2. Slide the harmonic bars that you want to hear. Slide the harmonic bars to adjust the volume of each footage over a range of nine steps (08) and you can layer the sound of multiple harmonic bars.

Various pitches can be combined for the Lower keyboard in the same way as for the Upper keyboard.

The harmonic bar for the Solo part will adjust the volume of the voice selected for the Solo part. When you move the Solo parts harmonic bar, the Solo parts level indicator will also change.

Playing a Vintage Organ Voice

NOTE

The glide, pitch bend and sustain effects cannot be applied to vintage organ voices.

55

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 56

Adding Sparkle to the Sound (Percussion)

This adds an attack sound to the beginning of the note, making the sound crisper.

3. Press the Percussion [4] button or [2 2/3] button (indicator lit). Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added.

Adjusting the Rate at which the Percussion Decays

You can shorten the decay time of the percussion sound.

4. Press the Percussion [Fast Decay] button to switch the indicator between lit/unlit.

Button Description

Percussion [4] button Percussion one octave above

Percussion [2 2/3] button Percussion one octave and a fifth above

[Fast Decay] Button Description

Lit The percussion sound will disappear quickly. The percussion will have a sharper attack.

Unlit The percussion sound will disappear slowly. The percussion will have a more gentle attack.

NOTE

Percussion [4] and [2 2/3] buttons cannot be used simultaneously.

NOTE

The Percussion [4] button and Percussion [2 2/3] button are valid only for vintage organ voices of the upper part.

56

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 57

Using the Harmonic Bar Settings of the Panel

If youve edited the harmonic bar settings in the screen, or if youve switched Registrations so that the Vintage Organ settings have changed, you can switch the Vintage Organ settings to the positions (settings) of the harmonic bars on the panel (p. 53).

1. Press the [H-Bar Manual] button. When you press the Vintage Organ button, a vintage organ screen like the following will appear.

Vintage Organ Screen fig.01-24.eps

The screen will show the harmonic bars. By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume of each footage. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (08). When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.

Icon Description

Vib (Vibrato) Adds a vibrato effect to the sound.

Cho (Chorus) Adds a chorus effect to the sound.

U/L/P Touching < > cycles you through the available choices, which are: Upper Vintage screen, Lower Vintage screen, and Pedal Vintage screen.

Hold The Vintage Organ screen will automatically close after it has been displayed for several seconds. If you touch , the screen will remain displayed until you touch once again.

When you touch the Vintage Organ screen and then change the settings, the screen is held in that condition.

By touching the screen and sliding your fingertip to the left or right (horizontally), you can adjust the volume of all harmonic bars.

NOTE

It is not possible to apply both vibrato and chorus simultaneously.

57

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 58

Adjusting the Volume of the Vintage Organ

You can adjust the overall volume of the sound to regulate the volume balance relative to the other sounds.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the VintageOrganVolume.

fig.05-12-2.eps

4. Touch the value setting buttons for VintageOrganVolume to adjust the setting.

fig.05-12-2.eps

5. Touch < > < > to edit the value.

6. Touch .

Setting

112

58

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 59

For Active Expression Voices, operating the expression pedal will control not only the volume but also the tone, or may add additional sounds.

1. Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to assign an Active Expression voice. The Others Voice screens appears. Active Expression voices can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal, and Solo part.

2. Touch a button that shows a sound group. A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

3. In the sub-window, touch (Active Expression Voice).

fig.01-16.eps

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Active Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed.

fig.01-44.eps

4. Touch < > < > to change screens, and touch a voice name.

5. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. An active expression voice will be selected.

Performing with an Active Expression Voice

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

NOTE

Although you can select an Active Expression voice with the [Others] button for parts other than Lower Orchestral, Upper Orchestral, Pedal and Solo, no Active Expression effect is

applied. The (Active

Expression) icon does not appear when an Active Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active Expression effect is not being used.

Sounds marked by

support the Active Expression function.

For details on the active expression voices that are available, refer to Voice list (Appendix: separate booklet).

59

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 60

In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play human voice, which produces a vocal-like sound.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark). The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice. The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

fig.01-15.eps

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group. fig.01-15.eps

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group. fig.01-16.eps

Performing with a Human Voice

For details on the Human Voice that are available, refer to Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

NOTE

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

60

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 61

4. In the sub-window, touch . The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice group. The Others Voice screen appears, and the sounds of the Human Voice group appears.

fig.01-40.eps

5. Touch < > < > to switch the screen, and touch a voice name to select the desired voice.

fig.01-41.eps

6. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

For some human voices, such as Jazz Scat, the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard. If the Utility menu setting Initial Touch (p. 198) is OFF, the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing.

61

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 62

The ATELIER allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for each Part.

fig.01-26.eps

The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of Parts.

Adjust the Volume Balance

Button Part

Accomp/SMF [] [] button

Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)

Playback of performance songs from something other than the ATELIER performance songs (for example: SMF music files)

Rhythm [] [] button (When the [Manual Percussion] button is ON)

Manual percussion

Rhythm [] [] button (When the [Manual Percussion] button is OFF)

Rhythm performance

Drums/SFX

Pedal Level [] [] button Pedal part voice

Bass note of Automatic Accompaniment

You can use the Solo parts harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part.

62

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 63

1. The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding [] and [] buttons. Pressing the upper button ([] button) will increase the volume.

Pressing the lower button ([] button) will decrease the volume.

The volume can be set to any value from 0 to 12.

When the volume value shown in the display is 0, that part will produce no sound.

You can also press the [] button or [] button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust, so that the Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance.

fig.01-27.eps The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically. If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch .

63

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 64

The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave steps. This function is called Octave Shift. You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch either , , or .

3. Touch < > < > to display the Octave Shift.

Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)

Menu Part whose pitch will change

Upper To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part

Lower To change the pitch of the Lower part

Pedal To change the pitch of the Pedal part

64

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 65

4. Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift settings you wish to change.

fig.01-30.eps

5. Touch < > < > to adjust the settings. The value can be set to a range of +/- 3 octaves.

fig.01-31.eps

6. Touch . You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard screen.

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

When the power is turned on, the Octave Shift setting for the Pedal part will be set to -1 (1 octave down).

NOTE

Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices, their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended note ranges, and they may not sound as expected. Care should be taken when using Octave Shift.

65

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 66

You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set). In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.

fig.01-32_AT-900.eps

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.

The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several seconds.

fig.01-33-1.eps

2. Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum sounds on each key.

Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)

Refer to Drum Set List for details on which drum sound or Sound Effect will be played by each note.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Percussion] buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

For some drum sets, there will be keys that do not sound.

66

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 67

As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect. When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will change.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up. The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds.

fig.01-33-1.eps

2. While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/ SFX set name in the screen. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink.

You can select from 16 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows:

3. Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.

Changing Drums/SFX Sets

Drums/SFX Set

POP, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS

For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key, refer to Drum/SFX Set List (Appendix: separate booklet).

You can also confirm the Drums/SFX set by touching in the Drums/SFX screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set.

NOTE

After the Drums/SFX (drums/ sound effects) screen is displayed, it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums/sound effects set. If you wish to switch drums/sound effect sets, quickly select the desired drums/sound effect set while the Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen is displayed.

67

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 68

You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects.

fig.01-34_AT-900.eps

fig.01-35.eps

fig.01-35-2

1. Press the [Manual Percussion] button (indicator lights). The button will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (dark) each time it is pressed. The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

fig.01-36-1.eps

2. When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key.

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)

the keys for Drum sounds or Sound Effects

Lower Keyboard15 keys

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Percussion] buttons simultaneously (p. 66).

68

Selecting and Playing Sounds

S electing and P

laying S ounds

AT-500_e.book 69

You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set.

When you change the Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SET1 drum set will sound.

1. Press the [Manual Percussion] button (indicator lights). The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

fig.01-36-1.eps

2. While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a manual percussion set name in the screen. The [Manual Percussion] button indicator will begin to flash.

You can select from 6 different Manual Percussion Sets;

3. Press the [Manual Percussion] button once again. The [Manual Percussion] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets

Manual Percussion Set

PERC SET 1, PERC SET 2, ORCHESTRA SET, LATIN SET, VOICE PHRASE, SFX SET

Refer to Manual Percussion List (Appendix: separate booklet) for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note.

NOTE

The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close after several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set. If you wish to change the manual percussion set, you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed.

You can also confirm the Manual Percussion set by touching in the Manual Percussion screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set.

69

Selecting and Playing Sounds

AT-500_e.book 70

You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.

1. Hold down the Pedal [To Lower] button for several seconds until its indicator begins blinking.

fig.02-14_AT-900.eps

The following message appears.

The notes played on the lower keyboard will continue sounding.

2. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button so its indicator goes out. The sound that was being sustained will stop, and the instrument will return to the normal playing state.

Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Voice Hold)

The Pedal [To Lower] button is ON simultaneously.

70

AT-500_e.book 71

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

The ATELIER lets you enjoy playing along with a Rhythmic accompaniment.

The ATELIER provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments (Music Styles).

The ten buttons below are called Rhythm buttons, and let you select Rhythms that are categorized by musical style.

fig.02-01_AT-900.eps

1. Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group. The indicator will light.

A Rhythm screen like the following appears. fig.02-09.eps

The Rhythms in the selected Rhythm group appear in the display.

2. Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm. The indicator of Rhythm button will blink.

3. Press the Rhythm button once again (indicator lights constantly). The Rhythm buttons indicator will change from blinking to light.

Selecting a Rhythm

For details, refer to the Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching in the Main screen.

You can also confirm the Rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

71

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 72

The ATELIER features a User memory.

The ATELIER is shipped from the factory with Rhythms already stored in User memory. These Rhythms can be rewritten at will; either by copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or by saving User Rhythms youve created using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 187). The content of User memory is retained even while the ATELIERs power is turned off. You can call up Rhythms in User memory by pressing the [User] button.

Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory

1. Press the [User] button. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > on the Rhythm screen to select User. The Rhythms stored in user memory will be shown.

3. Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm. The indicator of [User] button will blink.

4. After selecting a Rhythm, press the flashing [User] button once more. The [User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the Rhythm has been selected.

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory If you wish to copy a Rhythm saved on USB memory to User memory, refer to Copying Rhythms (p. 87).

What is the User Memory?

This is the internal memory area that lets you store User Rhythms youve created. You can also copy Rhythms saved on USB memory to the User memory (p. 87).

If you want to restore the original Rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory, refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings (p. 218).

If USB memory is connected,

you can touch < -> < >

to select Ext Memory so that

Rhythms in the USB memory will

be shown.

You can also confirm the Rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

72

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 73

You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set. You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The following Rhythm screen appears. fig.02-09.eps

2. Touch < > on the Main screen. A sub-window appears.

fig.02-30.eps

Rhythm Search

You can also search only for Rhythms other than the internal Rhythms accessed with the

[User] button. The icon

does not appear in the display while the [User] button Rhythms are displayed.

If another screen is open, touch

to access the main screen.

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm buttons.

73

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 74

Searching by Rhythm Name

3. Touch .

4. Decide which character you will use for the search. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABC...).

Touch to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch (Start Search). The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

6. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm. Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

Searching by Conditions

3. Touch . You can use four different criteria in searches: Tempo, Beat, Groove, and Genre.

4. Touch the value for the search term.

5. Touch < > < > to adjust the settings.

6. Touch (Start Search). The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

7. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm. Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

74

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 75

There are two ways to start the Rhythm. You can press the [Start/Stop] button to start the Rhythm, or you can use Sync Start to have the Rhythm start when you play the lower keyboard or the pedal keyboard.

You can also make the Rhythm start with an intro, or stop with an ending. fig.02-03_AT-900.eps

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

2. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the Variation [1] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

3. Press the [Start/Stop] button. A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Playing Rhythm

Starting at the Press of a Button

The functions of the [Intro/ Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 121).

You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button or Fill In [Break] button (p. 203).

For more on the Variation buttons, refer to Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 79).

75

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 76

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. The [Intro/Ending] buttons indicator will light.

3. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard. The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard. The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the Variation [1] button.

3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. [Intro/Ending] button indicator will blink.

4. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard. A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start)

NOTE

If the Arranger function is ON (the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing the pedalboard (p. 78).

For more on the Variation button, refer to Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 79).

76

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 77

Stopping with an Ending

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Stopping without an Ending

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Making the Ending Short and Simple

1. Press the Variation [1] button.

2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 78).

fig.02-04.eps

1. Press the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment.

By pressing the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm.

The value of the tempo currently set (20500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen.

Stopping the Rhythm

Changing a Rhythms Tempo

Tempo [ ] button The tempo becomes slower

Tempo [ ] button The tempo becomes faster

The functions of the [Intro/ Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 121).

If Auto Std Tempo (p. 203) is on, and you switch the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo will automatically be set appropriately for that Rhythm. If you switch Rhythms when Auto Std Tempo is off, the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the Rhythm.

You can confirm the tempo and beat with the bouncing ball in the Main screen (p. 29).

You can also use the [Value] dial to change the tempo.

77

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 78

If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you are to start playing.

fig.02-05_AT-900.eps

1. Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.

2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

3. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.

When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard starts the intro, and a countdown is given.

4. To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button, turning off the indicator light.

The Arranger function of the ATELIER can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard.

fig.02-06.eps

1. Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights).

2. Start the Rhythm (p. 75). The Rhythm and the Automatic Accompaniment will play together.

If the Arranger [On/Off] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected, the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound.

Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro

Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment

Arranger [On/Off] button Function

Lit (On) Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment

Unlit (Off) Rhythm

You can change the countdown sound (p. 202).

NOTE

When the Arranger [On/Off] button is on, Sync Start (p. 76) on the pedalboard cannot be used.

NOTE

The lower voice is not played during the performance of the intro and ending, even when the Lower keyboard is played.

78

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 79

You can add variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment by changing the Rhythm pattern of the Rhythm or the arrangement of the Automatic Accompaniment, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping the Rhythm for one measure).

fig.02-07_AT-900.eps

You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is called Variation. For each Rhythm, there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment. The following buttons are called Variation buttons.

fig.02-08_AT-900.eps

1. Press the Variation buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment. The indicator of the button you pressed will light. The Variation [1] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the Variation [4] button produces the most florid. For an intro or ending, Variation [1] button is the shortest and simplest.

Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment

Button name Function

Fill In [Auto] button A fill-in will automatically be added when you press a Variation button to change the accompaniment or Rhythm arrangement.

Fill In [Break] button Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation)

The functions of the Variation buttons and Fill In [Break] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to Changing the Function of the Foot Switch (p. 121).

Whats a fill-in?

A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes (between Choruss or Verses).

You can change the behavior of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill In [Break] button (p. 203).

79

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 80

Chord Intelligence is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment.

For example, in order to make the instrument detect a C Major chord, you must normally play the three keys C, E, and G. If you use the Chord Intelligence function, you can simply press a single C key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-09.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)

For more information about chord fingering, refer to the Chord List (p. 249).

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing a Rhythm button.

80

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 81

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

fig.02-11.eps

4. Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it ON. The Chord Intelligence function can now be used.

Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/ OFF.

If you press the root note of the chord (p. 251) in the lower keyboard when the Chord Intelligence function is ON, all notes in that chord will sound. For example, if you press the root C of the C major chord in the lower keyboard, the notes of the C major chord C, E, and G will be sounded by the voice selected for the lower part.

5. If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function, switch it OFF.

When the Leading Bass function (p. 82) is on and the Chord Intelligence function is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

When you touch the [One Touch Program] button, the Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON.

81

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 82

When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note (p. 251) of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard.

If the Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note (the bottom note of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played (p. 251).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-09.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

Leading Bass Function

When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord Intelligence function (p. 80) is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons.

82

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 83

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

fig.02-11.eps

4. Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it ON. Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.

5. To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass setting to OFF.

You can assign the Leading Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to Changing the Function of the Foot Switch (p. 121).

83

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 84

The ATELIER provides a very convenient [One Touch Program] button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected.

By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following settings.

Panel settings (e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the Rhythm

Arranger [On/Off] button lit (Automatic Accompaniment playing)

[Sync Start] button and [Intro/Ending] button lit (Waiting for Sync Start) (p. 76)

Chord Intelligence function is ON (p. 80)

The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows.

8 panel settings for each Rhythm (4 panel settings x 2 groups)

A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program)

What is Sync Start?

Sync Start is a function that starts the Rhythm at the moment that you play the lower keyboard or pedalboard.

What is Chord Intelligence?

Chord Intelligence is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during Automatic Accompaniment.

NOTE

If the Arranger function is ON (the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing the pedalboard (p. 78).

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 Group (Band)

2 Group (Orchestra)

Rhythm

84

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 85

1. Select a Rhythm (p. 71).

2. Press the [One Touch Program] button. The [One Touch Program] buttons indicator will light.

fig.02-15.eps

An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select) screen like the one shown below will be displayed.

fig.02-16.epsf

3. While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group. If you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, Basic will be selected automatically.

Panel settings appropriate for the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will automatically be called up for Registration [1][4] buttons.

4. Press the Registration [1][4] button to select panel settings.

5. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord. At the moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

6. Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the Rhythm. Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops.

7. Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator. You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the [One Touch Program] button.

When you press the [One Touch Program] button, the Arranger Update setting will automatically change to INSTANT (p. 99).

To redisplay the One Touch Program Group screen, while holding down the Registration [Write] button, press the [One Touch Program] button. Touch the One Touch Program Group screen to reselect the group.

The One Touch Program function will be turned off if youre using the Quick Registration function (p. 35) or if youve loaded a Registration. (p. 106)

85

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 86

The ATELIER contains a variety of Rhythms, but you can also use Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk to perform Rhythms in an even wider range of styles.

1. Press the Rhythm [User] button (confirm that its indicator is lit). The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-21-1.eps

2. Connect the USB memory containing the Rhythms to the external memory connector.

3. Touch < > < > to select Ext Memory and see the Rhythms in USB memory. The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the USB memory.

fig.02-21.eps

4. Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm. The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory.When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected Rhythm.

5. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The selected Rhythm is played.

Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory

Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory

NOTE

Unauthorized use of commercially available Music Style disk for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

If you copy Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk into user memory (p. 72), youll be able to access those Rhythms simply by pressing the [User] button (p. 87).

If you want to use Rhythms from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

If User is selected, the Rhythms saved in User memory (p. 72) will be shown. If Disk is selected, the Rhythms saved on the floppy disk will be shown.

86

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 87

User memory (p. 72) already contains Rhythms, but you can replace these Rhythms with Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk. Rhythms copied from the USB memory into User memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off. It is convenient to copy frequently-used Rhythms into User memory.

Rhythms that youve created and saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory (p. 89).

Copying Rhythms from USB Memory to User Memory

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-09.eps

3. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

Copying Rhythms

If you want to copy Rhythms from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

87

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 88

4. Touch . The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

5. Touch (Rhythm Copy). The Rhythm File Copy screen appears.

6. Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the Rhythm you want to copy). If you want to copy a Rhythm from USB memory, select Ext Memory. If you want to copy a Rhythm from floppy disk, select Disk.

7. Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm you want to copy.

8. Touch User < > < > to select the copy-destination number.

Numbers for which a Rhythm name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.

If you choose , all the Rhythms stored in the currently selected folder of USB memory or the floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

88

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 89

9. Touch . The copying of the Rhythm to User memory begins.

When copying ends, the - - - - - in the screen will change to the Rhythm name that you copied.

If you select a number in which a Rhythm is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

fig.02-25.eps

If you want to delete the previously saved Rhythm and overwrite it with the Rhythm youre newly saving, touch .

If you dont want to delete the previously saved Rhythm, touch , then select a number at which no Rhythm has been saved, and copy the Rhythm to that number.

Copying Rhythms from User Memory to USB Memory

You can copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory.

In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Rhythm File Copy screen in step 5 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, youll be copying Rhythms from user memory to USB memory.

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory.

NOTE

Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the Rhythm data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the Rhythm data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Rhythm stored in the user memory to the factory settings (p. 218), copy the Rhythm from USB memory once more.

You can return only the user memory to the factory settings. Refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings (p. 218).

89

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 90

You can rearrange the order of the Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-09.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms

90

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 91

3. Touch . The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

fig.02-32.eps

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose User if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in user memory, or choose Ext Memory if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose Disk if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.

5. Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm.

6. Touch or to move the Rhythm.

7. Touch .

Button Meaning Description

Rename Modify the name The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 92).

Up Change the order (upward)

The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order.

Down Change the order (downward)

The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order.

Delete Delete the Rhythm The selected Rhythm will be deleted (p. 94).

Copy Copies the Rhythm You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory (p. 87).

91

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 92

You can rename Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

3. Touch . The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

fig.02-32.eps

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose User if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in user memory, or choose Ext Memory if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose Disk if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.

5. Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm whose name you want to change.

Renaming a Saved Rhythm

92

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 93

6. Touch . The Rename screen appears.

fig.02-30.eps

7. Touch < > to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols. Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase ....

8. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

To cancel the operation, touch .

9. When youre done making the settings, touch . The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears.

10. Touch .

Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

Symbols ! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Delete a character.

Insert a space.

Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

93

Using Rhythm Performance

AT-500_e.book 94

You can delete Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or USB memory.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

3. Touch . The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.

fig.02-32.eps

Deleting Saved Rhythm

Button Meaning Description

Rename Modify the name The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 92).

Up Change the order (upward)

The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order (p. 90).

Down Change the order (downward)

The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order (p. 90).

Delete Delete the Rhythm The selected Rhythm will be deleted.

Copy Copies the Rhythm You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory (p. 87).

94

Using Rhythm Performance

U sing R

hythm P

erform ance

AT-500_e.book 95

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose User if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in user memory, or choose Ext Memory if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in USB memory. Choose Disk if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in floppy disk.

5. Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm that you wish to delete.

6. Touch . The following display appears.

fig.DelRhythmOK?.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

7. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm, touch . When a Rhythm is deleted, the deleted Rhythm name will change to - - - - -.

fig.02-33.eps

95

96

AT-500_e.book 96

Using the Registration Buttons

The ATELIER allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the Registration buttons.

The ATELIER has a total of eight Registration buttons, and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button, for a total of eight types of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a Registration.

This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting.

fig.03-01.eps

About the Registration Buttons

In addition to assigning voices and Rhythms to the Registration buttons, you can also store the following settings: Panel button settings (for example, settings for the Level [] [] buttons

and Solo [To Lower] button, etc.) Controller settings (functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend range,

etc.) Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial

touch, etc.)

If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the Registration buttons, refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons (p. 253).

The eight settings stored at the Registration buttons can be saved as a set in USB memory, a floppy disk, or user memory (p. 103).

In addition to the settings saved to the Registration buttons, the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved. Registration Name p. 101 Registration Shift p. 122 Arranger Update p. 99 Trans. Update (Transpose Update) p. 205 Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) p. 124 Rhythm Mode setting p. 203

Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons [1][8] are remembered even if the power is turned off. If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings, use the Factory Reset operation (p. 24).

Recorded performance data and Rhythms from User memory (p. 72) are not stored in Registration sets. When a Rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a Registration set, that Rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory.

With the factory settings, the Arranger Update setting is set to DELAYED. If Arranger Update is set to DELAYED, you will need to hold down the Registration button for several seconds in order to recall the tempo and Rhythm settings. If you want the tempo and Rhythm settings to be recalled instantly when you press a Registration button, change the Arranger Update setting to INSTANT. For details, refer to Recalling a Registration (p. 98)

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 97

Procedure for Creating Registration Sets

Prepare the Registrations A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration [1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song.

Save the Registrations to the USB memory or User memory If you want to use more than eight Registrations in a song, save the settings for Registration buttons [1][8] to a USB memory or User memory as a set, then continue to store further panel settings again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the USB memory or user memory.

Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used Save the Registration sets to the USB memory or user memory in the order they are to be used in the song. You can use the File Edit function (p. 112) to alter the sequence and names of Registrations contained on the USB memory or User memory (p. 101) as well as delete such Registrations (p. 110).

Using Registration Sets

Call up the Registration sets saved on the USB memory to the ATELIER Insert the USB memory containing the saved Registration sets into the external memory connector, and read the Registration sets into the ATELIER. Switch the Registration sets as you perform Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song. To call up the next Registration Set, assign the foot switch to RIGHT + Load Next and recall the next Registration set (p. 122).

fig.03-03.eps

1. Make all the panel settings that you wish to store.

2. While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the Registration buttons [1][8]. The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.

Storing Registrations

For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration, refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons (p. 253).

97

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 98

Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1][8] can be recalled in two ways: INSTANT and DELAYED.

At the factory this is set to DELAYED.

Recalling Voices and Other Panel Settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1][8].

Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to the Panel Settings

1. Press and hold a Registration button [1][8] for several seconds. The indicator of the Rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings and settings related to Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.

Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to Panel Settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1][8].

Recalling a Registration

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED)

How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT)

When changing the way Registrations are called up, refer to Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations (p. 99).

98

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 99

Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button [1][8] for several seconds, but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.03-06.eps

3. Touch . The Registration Options screen appears.

fig.03-07.eps

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

You can also use the following method to open the Registration Options screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the Registration [Write] button.

The Registration Options screen appears.

99

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 100

4. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between DELAYED and INSTANT. Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT.

5. Touch .

When the [Manual] button is ON (lit), all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating the Registration that had been previously saved.

fig.03-08.eps

Setting Description

DELAYED

When you press and hold a Registration button [1][8] for several seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings. If you press and immediately release a Registration button [1] [8], only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.

INSTANT The panel settings and settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button [1][8].

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings

You can change the timing of recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration button. For details refer to Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled (p. 205).

NOTE

The settings stored in the [Manual] button will return to their default values when the power is turned off.

100

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 101

When saving Registration sets, names like Factory Reg. will be assigned by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

2. Touch . The Registration Save screen appears.

fig.03-09-3.eps

3. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.03-10-2.eps

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

101

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 102

4. Touch . The Rename screen appears.

fig.03-11-2.eps

5. Touch < > to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols. Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase ....

6. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

To cancel the operation, touch .

7. When youre done making the settings, touch . The Registration set in the ATELIERs internal memory has now been named.

fig.03-12.eps

Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

Symbols ! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Delete a character.

Insert a space.

Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways.

Main screen Registration Load screen

Utility screen

102

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 103

With the settings of Registration buttons [1][8] considered as one set, you can store the Registration set to USB memory or User memory. We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on USB memory. Furthermore, when you save Registrations created on the ATELIER to USB memory, you can call up their settings on other ATELIER Series instruments and use the Registrations the same way.

1. Connect your USB memory to the external memory connector. If you want to save Registration data to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-09-3.eps

3. Touch . The Registration Save screen appears.

fig.03-09.eps

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to save the Registration to User memory, select User. If you want to save the Registration to USB memory, select Ext Memory. If you want to save the Registration to floppy disk, select Disk.

Saving Registration Sets

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

If you wish to assign a name before you save, refer to Assigning a Name to a Registration Set (p. 101).

103

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 104

5. Touch < > < > in the screen to select the save- destination number. Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as - - - - -.

fig.03-09-2.eps

To cancel the Save operation, touch to close the Registration Save screen.

6. Touch . The Save Format screen appears.

fig.03-14.eps

7. Touch or .

8. Touch . Saving of the Registration data will begin.

When saving ends, the - - - - - in the screen will change to the Registration name that you saved.

If youve named the Registration, it will be saved with that name.

Settings Description

Original

Save formats that can be used with the AT-900, AT-900C, AT-800, AT-500, AT-300, AT-100 and AT-75 when saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-SL Series, AT-45, AT-15 and AT-S Series devices.

R-Series Save formats that can be used with AT-R Series devices

You can also save Registrations in a folder. Refer to Saving Registrations in a folder (p. 105).

104

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 105

If the following screen appears

If you select a number at which a Registration has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears.

fig.E-63.eps

If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data

1. Touch .

If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Registration

1. Touch . Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled.

2. In the Registration Save screen, select the number that is displayed as ----- (a number that currently does not contain Registration data).

3. Touch (p. 103). When saving is complete, the saved Registration name will be displayed.

To create a folder, refer to Creating a Folder (p. 44)

Saving Registrations in a folder

1. Carry out steps 1 through 4 of Saving Registration Sets (p. 103).

2. Touch < > < > to select a folder.

3. Touch the folder namve. The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.

4. Carry out steps 5 through 8 of Saving Registration Sets(p. 104).

To exit the folder

1. Touch < > < > to select Up.

2. Touch the Up indication.

105

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 106

Heres how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the User memory or USB memory into the memory of the ATELIER. Registrations can be selected in the following three ways.

Loading a Set of Registrations (Load) p. 106 You can load a set (a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1][8]) from USB memory or user memory.

Loading an Individual Registration (Load One) p. 107 Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1][8] buttons.

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the USB Memory or User Memory (Load Next) p. 122 Assign RIGHT+ Load Next to the foot switch, and recall Registration sets in the order in which they are stored in USB memory or user memory.

1. If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector. If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER

Loading a Set of Registrations

NOTE

Be aware that when you load Registrations from a USB memory or user memory, the Registrations that were previously in internal memory will be lost. It is a good idea to save important Registrations to USB memory or user memory (p. 103).

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

When you touch , the instrument jumps to the Registration Save screen.

106

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 107

3. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select Ext Memory.

If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select Disk.

If you want to load from the Registration of user memory, select User.

4. Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory. To cancel operation, touch .

5. Touch . The Registration data will start being load.

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

1. If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector. If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

3. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select Ext Memory.

If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select Disk.

If you want to load from the Registration of user memory, select User.

Loading an Individual Registration

To select a Registration from a folder, refer to Selecting a Registration from within a folder (p. 113).

NOTE

Since the ATELIER is designed with compatibility in mind, Registrations created on other instruments in the ATELIER series can be recalled. However, due to differences in the built-in sounds and functions, there will be cases in which the settings cannot be exactly replicated.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.

107

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 108

4. Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.

5. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.03-06.eps

6. Touch . The Load One Registration screen appears.

fig.03-19.eps

7. Touch <1><12> to select the number of the Registration button that you wish to load into internal memory.

fig.03-20.eps

108

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 109

8. Touch Internal <1><8> to select the number of the storage-destination button.

fig.03-21.eps

To cancel this operation, touch .

9. When youre done making the settings, touch . The following display appears.

fig.03-22.eps

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

109

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 110

Heres how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a USB memory, User memory (p. 218), or floppy disk.

1. Prepare the Registration that you want to delete. If you want to delete Registration data from the USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to delete Registration data from the floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

3. Touch . The Registration File Edit screen appears.

fig.03-25.eps

Deleting a Set of Registrations

Button Meaning Description

Rename Modify the name The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected Registration (p. 101).

Up Change the order (upward)

The selected Registration will be moved earlier in the order (p. 112).

Down Change the order (downward)

The selected Registration will be moved later in the order (p. 112).

Delete Delete the Registration The selected Registration will be deleted.

Create Create new folder A new folder will be created.

Copy Copies the Registration

You can copy Registration from USB memory to user memory, or copy Registration from user memory to USB memory (p. 114).

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

110

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 111

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to delete from the Registration to USB memory, select Ext Memory.

If you want to delete from the Registration to floppy disk, select Disk.

If you want to delete from the Registration to user memory, select User.

5. Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to delete.

6. Touch . The following display appears.

fig.E-64.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

7. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Registration, touch . When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration File Edit screen will reappear.

When a Registration is deleted, the deleted Registration name will change to - - - - -.

fig.03-28.eps

111

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 112

After saving Registrations on USB memory, user memory (p. 218), or floppy disk, you can change the order or name of the Registrations, or delete a Registration (p. 110). If you assign the foot switch to RIGHT + Load Next (p. 122), youll be able to recall Registration sets in the order in which they are stored in USB memory or user memory. This function is very convenient when youre getting ready to perform.

1. Prepare the Registration(s) that you want to rename or sort. If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the External Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

3. Touch . The Registration File Edit screen appears.

fig.03-25.eps

Changing the Name or Order of Registration

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

112

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 113

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose Ext Memory if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory, or Disk if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk. Choose User if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved in user memory.

5. Touch < > < > in the screen to select a Registration.

Changing the Order of Registration

6. Touch or to move the Registration.

Changing the Name of the Registration

7. Touch . The Rename screen appears.

Rename the Registration as described in Assigning a Name to a Registration Set (p. 101).

8. Touch . To cancel the operation, touch .

Button Mean Description

Up Change the order (upward)

The selected Registration will be moved earlier in the order.

Down Change the order (downward)

The selected Registration will be moved later in the order.

NOTE

If theres a Registration that you want to delete, touch

< > < > to select the Registration, then touch . When a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears, touch .

You can rename the folder in the Registration File Edit screen.

To create a folder, refer to Creating a Folder (p. 44)Selecting a Registration from within a folder

1. Touch on the Main screen to display the Registration Load screen.

2. Touch < > < > to select a folder.

3. Touch the folder name. The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.

4. Touch the Registration name.

To exit the folder

1. Touch < > < > to select Up.

2. Touch the Up indication.

113

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 114

Registrations from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to user memory.

If a Registration saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in user memory, the stored Registration data will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used Registration into User memory.

Registrations saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory (p. 116).

Copying Registration from USB Memory to User Memory

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

fig.03-05.eps

3. Touch . The Registration File Edit screen appears.

fig.03-25.eps

Copying Registrations

If you want to copy Registration from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

114

Using the Registration Buttons

U sing the R

egistration B uttons

AT-500_e.book 115

4. Touch . The Registration File Copy screen appears.

5. Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the Registration you want to copy). If you want to copy a Registration from USB memory, select Ext Memory.

If you want to copy a Registration from floppy disk, select Disk.

6. Touch < > < > to select the Registration you want to copy.

7. Touch User < > < > to select the copy-destination number. Numbers for which a Registration name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.

8. Touch . The copying of the Registration to User memory begins.

When copying ends, the - - - - - in the screen will change to the Registration name that you copied.

If you choose , all Registrations stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

NOTE

Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the Registration data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the Registration data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Registration stored in the user memory to the factory settings (p. 218), re- load the Registration from USB memory.

115

Using the Registration Buttons

AT-500_e.book 116

If you select a number in which a Registration is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

fig.02-25.eps

If you want to delete the previously saved Registration and overwrite it with the Registration youre newly saving, touch .

If you dont want to delete the previously saved Registration, touch , then select a number at which no Registration has been saved, and copy the Registration to that number.

Copying Registration from User Memory to USB Memory

You can copy Registration from user memory to USB memory.

In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Registration File Copy screen in step 4 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, youll be copying Registration from user memory to USB memory.

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Registration from USB memory to user memory.

You can return only the user memory to the factory settings. Refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings(p. 218).

116

AT-500_e.book 117

Using the Performance Functions

U sing the P

erform ance F

unctions

You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called Key Transpose.

For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with numerous sharps or flats, you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to play.

fig.04-01.eps

1. Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and [+] buttons. Each time you press a Transpose [-] [+] button, the pitch will be transposed by a semitone.

Acceptable values range from A to G (in semitone steps).

The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen. fig.04-02.eps

State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons

2. By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously, you can restore the default setting C.

Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose)

If transposed (non-C) One of the Transpose [-] [+] button indicators is lit.

If not transposed (C) The Transpose [-] [+] button indicators are extinguished.

The transposition setting is stored in the Registration. For details on the settings that are stored in the Registration, refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons (p. 253).

You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled. For details refer to Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled (p. 205).

117

Using the Performance Functions

AT-500_e.book 118

Using the [Brilliance] slider, you can adjust the brightness of the sound.

For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.

fig.04-06.eps

You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the [Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards.

When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added to the voices.

While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained even if you release the keys.

fig.04-04.eps

By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound

Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal)

NOTE

This setting is not stored in the Registration.

You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper keyboard (p. 200).

NOTE

Decay can be applied to Pedal Bass voices played on the Lower keyboard (when the Pedal [To Lower] button indicators are lit or set Bass Split to ON ). In this case, a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice.

NOTE

Decay cannot be added to the Solo voices.

118

Using the Performance Functions

U sing the P

erform ance F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 119

When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend effect). Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower it. Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be obtained.

fig.04-05.eps

By default (immediately after the power is turned on) the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard.

Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever

Pitch Bend Effect

Vibrato Effect

You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard. Please refer to Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply (p. 200).

You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever. For details, refer to Changing the Pitch Bend Range (p. 201).

Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added, refer to Voice list (Appendix: separate booklet).

119

Using the Performance Functions

AT-500_e.book 120

On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches.

fig.04-07.eps

You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches. Please refer to Changing the Function of the Foot Switch (p. 121).

With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches.

You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual Registration buttons (p. 97).

Using the Foot Switches

Right Foot Switch Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow. If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch between Fast and Slow each time you press the Foot Switch.

Left Foot Switch

Glide (an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is returned to what is originally was when you release your foot). While you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch, the pitch will return to normal gradually.

NOTE

If Registration Shift is turned RIGHT, LEFT, or RIGHT +Load Next, the foot switch will function only to switch Registrations (p. 122).

The Glide effect will only be applied to the keyboard section that has been specified as being the destination for the Pitch bend/Vibrato lever. Please refer to Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply (p. 200).

120

Using the Performance Functions

U sing the P

erform ance F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 121

You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression Pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the L Foot Switch or R Foot Switch.

fig.09-08.eps

4. Touch or setting.

fig.09-09.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

If the Registration Shift setting is RIGHT, LEFT, or RIGHT + Load next, the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and the R Foot Switch or L Foot Switch setting will be ignored (p. 122).

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch

NOTE

Available functions Description

ROTARY FAST/SLOW Switch the Rotary speed between FAST and SLOW.

GLIDE

While the Foot Switch is pressed, the pitch will temporarily be lowered, and will gradually return to normal when you release the Foot Switch. When the power is turned on, Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard.

LEADING BASS The Leading Bass function (p. 82) will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

RHYTHM START/STP Start/Stop the Rhythm.

COMP PLAY/STOP

The same function as the Composer [Play/Stop] button. Each time you press the Foot Switch, the performance data will play back or stop.

INTRO/ENDING Play an Intro or Ending.

VARIATION UP

Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will increment.

VARIATION DOWN

Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will decrement.

VARIATION ALT.

Switches the Variation button. If the Variation [1] button or [3] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [1] and [3] buttons. If the Variation [2] button or [4] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [2] and [4] buttons.

FILL IN Adds a fill-in.

BREAK Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure.

DAMPER OF UPPER

Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

DAMPER OF LOWER

Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

OFF Turns the foot switch function off.

121

Using the Performance Functions

AT-500_e.book 122

You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order. The Registration will be switched each time you press the foot switch.

The Registration Shift settings are stored to each individual Registration Set. When RIGHT + Load Next is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch Registration Sets saved to a USB memory or floppy disk, set the Registration Shift setting to RIGHT + Load Next for all saved Registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Registration Shift.

fig.09-08.eps

4. Touch the Registration Shift setting (OFF/ RIGHT/LEFT/RIGHT + Load Next).

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is turned off.

What is Load Next? You can use the Load Next function to call up Registrations in the order saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. When you will be performing live, you can save Registration sets to USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next Registration set easily and smoothly.

Checking the next Registration set

1. Display the Main screen (p. 29).

2. Touch < > icon several times to switch to

< > (Regist).

The Main screen display will switch to the Registration. fig.03-23-2.eps

Next will indicate the name of the next Registration set.

Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations

Setting Description

OFF You can use a function assigned to the foot switch.

RIGHT The right foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.

NOTE

LEFT The left foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used.

RIGHT + Load Next

The right foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used. Selecting the Registration [8] button and pressing the right foot switch activates the Load Next function, calling up the next Registration saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. The Registration Load window appears in the display. When you then press the right foot switch again, the Registration Set is confirmed, and the Registration [1] button is selected. Example: 123...8 Load Next (Next Registration) 1

Setting Description

122

Using the Performance Functions

U sing the P

erform ance F

unctions

AT-500_e.book 123

You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back.

fig.04-03.eps

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal

You can specify how the Expression Pedal will affect the sound when it is pressed (p. 124).

Decrease the volume

Increase the volume

You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your performance (p. 199).

You can specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded performance (p. 200).

Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness.

The expression pedal features the following special characteristics:

Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero. If you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position.

Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a natural- sounding resonance.

When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can be used to produce changes in the voice (p. 59).

123

Using the Performance Functions

AT-500_e.book 124

You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the expression pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Curve (Expression Curve).

4. Touch setting. fig.09-11.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

fig.09-11-3.e.eps

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal

Setting Description

1

The position of the expression pedal does not really affect the Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment. This setting is convenient when you do not want to have the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment volume change much.

2

The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance. The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal, making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics.

3

The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance. The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2, so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes.

4

The expression pedal does not affect the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all. This setting is suitable for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments.

1

2

3

4

Rhythm, Auto

Accompaniment

Keyboard Part

Rhythm, Auto

Accompaniment

Keyboard Part

Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part

Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part

124

AT-500_e.book 125

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

The ATELIER allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard.

Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is called Harmony Intelligence.

When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.

fig.05-01.eps

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button (indicator lights). Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (unlit).

The name of the selected Harmony Intelligence will be displayed for several seconds in the screen.

fig.05-03.eps

Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence)

125

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 126

There are 18 different Harmony types.

The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type.

When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on (lit), a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button. The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.

fig.05-03.eps

2. Touch < > < > to switch the screen, and touch the screen to select the desired harmony intelligence. The indicator of the Harmony Intelligence [Harmony Intelligence] button will blink.

3. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again. The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.

Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type

Type of Harmony Intelligence

BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, TRADITIONAL*, HARP, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, COUNTRY, BROADWAY, OCTAVE 1*, OCTAVE 2*, 1 NOTE*, 3 NOTES*, BIG BAND*, STRINGS*, BLOCK*, JAZZ SCAT*, BROADWAY*

You can also confirm the Harmony Intelligence settings by touching on the Harmony Intelligence screen. You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence.

126

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 127

The way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony intelligence is described below.

Type Solo Voice Upper Voice Number of notes of the harmony

BIG BAND Trumpet Flugel Horn 5

STRINGS Strings 1 Strings 5 4

BLOCK Vibraphone Piano 1 5

TRADITIONAL* Currently Selected Tone 3

HARP Harp 2

COMBO Clarinet Trombone 3

JAZZ SCAT Jazz Scat Jazz Scat 4

COUNTRY Full Organ1 Jazz Guitar 3

BROADWAY Celesta Theater Or.1 3

OCTAVE 1* Currently Selected Tone 2

OCTAVE 2* Currently Selected Tone 2

1 NOTE* Currently Selected Tone 2

3 NOTES* Currently Selected Tone 4

BIG BAND* Currently Selected Tone 5

STRINGS* Currently Selected Tone 4

BLOCK* Currently Selected Tone 5

JAZZ SCAT* Currently Selected Tone 4

BROADWAY* Currently Selected Tone 3

NOTE

The number of notes of the harmony will depend on the Harmony Intelligence type.

Harp-type harmony intelligence does not sound the keys you play. Use your left hand to play a chord in the lower keyboard and use your right hand to play a glissando in the upper keyboard, and a beautiful harp glissando will be produced.

127

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 128

Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers. There is a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow.

fig.05-06.eps

1. Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.

2. Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button (confirm that its indicator is lit). The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.

3. Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch between Rotary Fast (Lit) and Rotary Slow (Unlit).

When you switch the rotary effect from Fast to Slow, the modulation will slow down gradually, and when you switch from Slow to Fast the modulation will speed up gradually.

Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)

Rotary [Fast/Slow] button Effect

Lit (Fast) The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being rapidly rotated.

Unlit (Slow) Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.

NOTE

For more on the tones to which the Rotary effect can be applied, refer to Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

You can assign the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button function to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 121).

128

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 129

You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed of the rotary effect (p. 128).

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the Rotary Speed.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Speed to adjust the setting.

fig.05-12-2.eps

5. Touch < > < > to edit the value.

6. Touch .

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed (Rotary Speed)

Setting

SLOW, NORMAL, FAST

129

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 130

This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary sound obtained when using the Rotary effect (p. 128).

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the Rotary Color.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Color to adjust the setting. Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will switch between BRIGHT and MELLOW.

5. Touch .

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color)

Setting

BRIGHT, MELLOW

130

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 131

Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one instrument sound like several. You can apply a chorus effect for the Upper Orchestral and Lower Orchestral voices.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch either or .

Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect)

Menu Description

Upper To apply chorus to the Upper Orchestral part

Lower To apply chorus to the Lower Orchestral part

For some of the voices, Chorus may already be turned ON.

131

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 132

3. For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect, touch the Chorus ON/OFF display to change the setting. Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

fig.05-15.eps

4. Touch .

Indication Description

ON The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice.

OFF The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.

NOTE

Some voices do not allow the Chorus effect to be applied. For details refer to Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet).

You can open the Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching and .

132

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 133

Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the keys are released.

The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper (except the Solo part), Lower, and Pedal voices.

When Applying Sustain to the Pedal Part fig.05-22.eps

1. Press the [Pedal Sustain] button to make the indicator light. The Sustain effect is applied to the voices of the Pedal Bass part.

When Applying Sustain to the Upper Part and Lower Part

1. Touch on the Main screen. ffig.00-06.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect)

NOTE

The Sustain effect will not be applied to the Solo part voice.

The length of Sustain can be modified independently for each part (p. 135).

133

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 134

2. Touch either or .

3. Touch < > < > to display the Sustain.

4. Touch the Sustain setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Sustain setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

5. Touch .

Indication Description

Upper To apply sustain to the Upper part

Lower To apply sustain to the Lower part

NOTE

You can touch to access the Pedalboard screen and change the sustain settings for the pedal part.

134

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 135

The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT, MIDDLE (Medium) or LONG) for the Upper and Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch either , , or .

3. Touch < > < > to display the Sustain Length.

fig.05-14.eps

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

4. For the part whose sustain length you wish to adjust, touch the Sustain SHORT/MIDDLE/ LONG display.

fig.05-14-2.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the value.

6. Touch .

Changing the Sustain Length

Menu Part whose sustain length you wish to change

Upper Upper part

Lower Lower part

Pedal Pedal part

Setting

SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG

135

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 136

Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room, a small club, etc.

fig.05-16-1.eps

1. Press the Reverb [] or [] buttons to adjust the overall Reverb amount. When you press the up button [], additional Reverb is applied. Pressing the down button [] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.

When you press the Reverb [] [] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth.

fig.01-27.eps

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb Effect)

The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically. If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch again.

136

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 137

By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the Reverb Type.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb Type to adjust the setting. The following screen appears.

fig.05-18.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

It is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval) when DELAY or PAN DELAY is selected.

6. Touch .

Changing the Reverb Type

Display Description

ROOM 1 Simulates the reverb of a conference room

ROOM 2 Simulates the reverb of a performance lounge

ROOM 3 Simulates the reverb of a large, open room

HALL 1 Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall

HALL 2 Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall

SMALL CHURCH The reverberation of a small church

LARGE CHURCH The reverberation of a large church

CATHEDRAL The reverberation of a cathedral

PLATE Applies a bright, metallic reverb

DELAY An echo-like sound repeated several times

PAN DELAY Similarly to the above but where the sound is panned between the left and right speakers

NOTE

137

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 138

By changing the type of reverb (p. 137) you can experience the feeling of performing in various different locations, and by changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the Wall Type.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to adjust the setting. The following screen appears.

fig.05-21.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

Changing the Wall Type

Display Description

DRAPERY Pleated curtain

CARPET Carpet

ACOUSTIC TILE Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile

WOOD Wood

BRICK Brick

PLASTER Plaster

CONCRETE BLOCK

Concrete block

MARBLE Marble

138

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 139

You can specify the reverb depth for each part.

To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/ Lower/Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen. ffig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch , , or .

3. Touch < > < > to display the Reverb Depth.

fig.05-17.eps

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

4. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust. The following screen appears.

fig.05-20.eps

5. Touch < > < > to adjust the setting.

6. Touch .

Changing the Depth of the Reverb

Menu Part whose reverb length you wish to change

Upper Upper part, Solo part

Lower Lower part

Pedal Pedal part

Setting

010

139

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 140

To Adjust the Reverb Depth for Something other Than Upper/Lower/ Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen. ffig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Effect screen appears.

fig.05-17.eps

3. Touch < > < > to display the Rev Depth (Reverb Depth).

fig.05-17_50

fig.05-12-3.eps

4. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust. The following screen appears.

fig.05-20-2.eps

5. Touch < > < > to adjust the setting.

For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting the AUTO setting. Parts for which AUTO is selected will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected.

6. Touch .

Part

Accomp (Automatic accompaniment other than the bass part)

Rhythm (Rhythm performance), Drums (Drums/SFX) M.Perc (Manual Percussion) A.Bass (Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment) Vintage (Vintage Organ)

Setting

010, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass only)

140

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 141

You can modify the sound simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller located on the panel.

1. Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in red.

2. Move your hand above the D Beam controller. The effect assigned to the D Beam controller will be applied to the sound.

Turning the D Beam Controller Off

3. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off.

Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment

Modifying the Sound

Button Button status Description

Pitch Lit (red) Changes the pitch of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.

Filter Lit (red)

Changes the tonal character of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard. * For some sounds, the tonal change may be

difficult to notice.

Volume Lit (red) Changes the volume of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.

When the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in green, the sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play when you move your hand above the D Beam controller (p. 142).

NOTE

The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will vary according to the brightness of its surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, you can readjust the sensitivity. Increasing the D Beam sensitivity value (p. 201) will make it more sensitive.

Effective range of the D Beam controller The illustration at right shows the effective range of the D Beam controller. Moving your hand outside this range will not produce any effect. The effective range of the D Beam controller will be drastically decreased under strong direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors.

141

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

AT-500_e.book 142

You can produce various sound effects simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller on the panel.

1. Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in green.

2. Move your hand above the D Beam controller. The sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play.

Turning the D Beam Controller Off

3. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off

Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect

Button Button status Description

Pitch Lit (green) A bass drum and cymbal will sound.

Filter Lit (green) The cymbal will be struck with gradually increasing force.

Volume Lit (green) The sound of a wind chime is produced.

When the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in red, an effect will be applied to the sound when you move your hand above the D Beam controller (p. 141).

142

MEMO

A pplying V

arious E ffects to the S

ound

AT-500_e.book 143

143

14

AT-500_e.book 144

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

Since the lower keyboard of the ATELIER provides a generous 64 notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility.

For example, the following applications are possible.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound Effects

Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard

Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower keyboard (p. 146).

fig.06-01.eps

Drums/SFX Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Press the [Manual Percussion] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice on the lower keyboard (p. 68).

fig.06-03.eps

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 66). fig.06-04.eps

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

4

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

U sing the Low

er K eyboard E

ffectively

AT-500_e.book 145

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice

By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 148) and Bass Split Point (p. 151), you can create the following types of setup.

Set Bass Split to ON to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard (p. 149). fig.06-02.eps

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 66), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 146) fig.06-01-2.eps

Drums/SFX Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

fig.06-05.eps

fig.06-06.eps

fig.06-07.eps

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

Manual Percussion Bass Lower Solo

Drums/SFX

145

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

AT-500_e.book 146

Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard. By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the right- hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called split, and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the Solo Split Point.

fig.06-08.eps

1. Select a Solo voice (p. 50).

2. Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights). When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point.

fig.06-09.eps

3. To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator turns off). The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice will now be played in the Upper keyboard.

Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)

The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.

NOTE

If the Solo [To Lower] is ON, the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard.

Lower keyboard Solo voice

Solo Split Point

You can adjust the Solo Split Point (p. 148).

You can change how the Solo voice will sound (p. 147).

You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that they will sound together (p. 147).

146

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

U sing the Low

er K eyboard E

ffectively

AT-500_e.book 147

When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will respond when more than one key is pressed.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Solo Mode. fig.09-05.eps

4. Touch the Solo Mode setting (the TOP NOTE, LAST NOTE, or POLYPHONIC indication).

fig.09-06.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard (i.e., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound together (layered), or will sound separately (split).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Solo To Lower Mode.

fig.09-07.eps

4. Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch between SPLIT and LAYER. Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it will alternate between SPLIT and LAYER.

5. Touch .

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds

Setting Description

TOP NOTE The Solo voice will sound the highest note that is played for the Solo part.

LAST NOTE The Solo voice will sound the note that was most recently played for the Solo part.

POLYPHONIC The Solo voice will sound all notes that are played for the Solo part.

Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice

Setting Description

SPLIT The parts will sound separately.

LAYER The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound together.

147

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

AT-500_e.book 148

This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice) on the Lower keyboard to any desired position.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Split Point screen appears.

fig.06-13.eps

3. Touch < > < > to change the Solo Split Point.

The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.

4. Touch .

Changing the Solo Split Point

Setting

A1C7

You can also set the split point by pressing the key of the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split Point.

fig.06-13-2.eps

1. While touching the Solo Split Point value (A1 C7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Solo Split Point. The Solo Split Point will be set.

148

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

U sing the Low

er K eyboard E

ffectively

AT-500_e.book 149

By using the Bass Split you can play the bass voice in the left-hand side (including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the Bass Split Point.

fig.06-15.eps

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 49).

2. Touch on the Main screen. fig.00-06.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

3. Touch .

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Bass Split)

You can adjust the Bass Split Point (p. 151).

149

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

AT-500_e.book 150

4. Touch < > < > to display the Bass Split.

5. Touch the Bass Split setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Bass Split setting, it will alternate ON/OFF. When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of (and including) the C3 note.

fig.06-16.eps

6. Touch .

The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal [To Lower] buttons (p. 152) simultaneously.

Lower keyboard

Bass Split Point

Pedal Bass voice

NOTE

If the Bass Split is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard. The Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard.

150

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

U sing the Low

er K eyboard E

ffectively

AT-500_e.book 151

You can assign the Bass Split Point (the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the Lower keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen. ffig.05-08.eps

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. fig.VoiceList.eps

2. Touch . The Split Point screen appears.

fig.06-13.eps

3. Touch < > < > to modify the Bass Split Point.

The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.

4. Touch .

Changing the Bass Split Point

Setting

A1C7

You can also set the bass split point by playing the desired key of the lower keyboard.

fig.06-13-3.eps

1. While touching the Bass Split Point value (A1 C7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point. The bass split point will be set.

151

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

AT-500_e.book 152

By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note (see p. 251) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice.

fig.06-18.eps

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 49).

2. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights). When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note.

If the Leading Bass function is on (p. 82), the lowest note played in the lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice.

3. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator turns off). The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button)

NOTE

If no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice (the [Drums/SFX] button is ON), the Pedal Bass voice will not sound.

If no voice is selected for the lower keyboard, you can use the lower keyboard to play the pedal voice.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Pedal [To Lower] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard.

152

AT-500_e.book 153

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

The internal composer can record performances and play back commercial SMF music files. The composer can be used in the following two ways.

Using the Panel Composer Buttons fig.07-01.eps

Touching in the Main Screen to Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/ Play Screens Composer Buttons fig.07-04.eps

Button Description

Reset Returns you to the beginning of the song.

Play/Stop

Starts and stops playback of the song.

After the [Rec] button has been pressed, putting the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when the [Play/Stop] button is pressed.

Rec The unit switches to record standby mode. * In record standby, the [Rec] button is

lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes.

Song The Song Select screen appears in the display.

Registration The Registration Load screen appears in the display.

Demo The Demo screen opens.

Button Description

Track Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control

Buttons for tracks to which performances are recorded light up. A lighted button can be toggled between lighted and unlit by pressing it. Tracks are muted when the buttons light is off.

For more about the track buttons, refer to p. 154.

Reset Returns you to the beginning of the song.

Stop Stops playback of the song.

Play

Starts playback of the song.

After has been touched to put the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when you touch .

Rec

The unit switches to record standby mode. * In record standby, is lit, and

flashes.

Bwd Rewinds the song.

Fwd Fast forwards the song.

You can toggle between display of the track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the track mute buttons by touching the button.

The Notation screen appears in the display.

The Utility screen for the Composer is displayed.

The VIMA TUNES screen is displayed. This button is shown only in the Rec/Play (record/play) screen.

153

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 154

The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired Track button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track. fig.07-04.eps

You can record different kinds of performance data into each track:

More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files, please refer to Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files (p. 158).

What is a Track Button?

Track Recorded Performance

Rhythm

Rhythm performance

Drums/SFX

Manual percussion

Accomp Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)

Bass

Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data (Note, Bender, Modulation)

Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment

Lower Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation)

Upper Upper Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation)

Solo Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation)

Control

Glide

Expression

Reverb Type

Reverb Depth

Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

Transpose [-] [+] button setting

[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)

Harmony Intelligence Type

Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)

Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF)

Pedal Bass Mode

Control

Solo Mode

Solo To Lower Mode

Solo Split Point

Bass Split (ON/OFF)

Bass Split Point

Sustain ON/OFF

Sustain Length

Initial Touch

Vintage Organ Setting

Wall Type

The Voices assigned for each part

Level [][] button (Part Balance Volume)

The Reverb depth for each part

The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice

The Octave shift settings for each part

[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)

Drums/SFX Set

[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)

Manual Percussion Set

Chord Intelligence

Chord Hold

Leading Bass

Lower Voice Hold (ON/OFF)

Tempo setting

Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part

Volume of the Rhythm drum part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part

Volume of the Rhythm bass part

Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part

Track Recorded Performance

154

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 155

During recording, the control track will store the operations as follows.

Recording panel operations (Voice selections, Tempo changes, etc.) Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data.

Recording expression pedal operations This will depend on the function of the expression pedal. Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for Exp. Src (Rec). For details refer to Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal (p. 199).

If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new performance data, use the editing function Erase (erase performance data) to erase the data (p. 167).

The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you record or play back a performance.

1. Touch on the Main screen. fig.05-08.eps

The Rec/Play screen appears. The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons.

fig.07-04.eps

All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm. If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 159).

Displaying the Track Buttons

155

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 156

In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the instrument and saved to a USB memory, ATELIER also lets you enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files, such as defined below.

To Play Back Only One Song

1. Prepare the song that you want to play back. If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector. If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

When the performance song loaded from a USB

memory is a Standard MIDI File, will be displayed on the Main screen.

fig.07-06.eps

2. Press the [Song] button. fig.07-09.eps

The Song Select screen appears. fig.07-10.eps

3. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to play a song from USB memory, choose Ext Memory. If you want to play a song from floppy disk, choose Disk.

4. In the screen, touch < > < > to select the song that you wish to play back.

5. Touch < > ( ) to play back the song.

6. Touch < > ( ) to stop the song.

You can also play back or stop the music files by touching or in the Rec/Play screen. By touching or you can rewind or fast-forward the performance.

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files

SMF Music Files SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created in order to standardize music data formats between manufacturers. Collections of songs in SMF music files are commercially available in a wide range of styles for enjoyment, as accompaniment for practicing musical instruments, and for karaoke. If you want to purchase SMF music files, you can contact the dealer where you purchased the ATELIER.

156

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 157

Playing Back All Performance Data

1. Prepare the song that you want to play back. If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector. If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

2. While holding down the [Song] button, press the [Play/Stop] button.

fig.01-01.eps

All performance data saved on the USB memory or floppy disk will be played consecutively.

3. To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop] button.

fig.07-08.eps

If Internal Memory Contains Performance Data that has not been Saved

If internal memory contains performance data that has not been saved to USB memory or the Favorites (user memory), the message The song will be erased. OK? will appear.

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch . Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 169).

When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as Track Mute.

If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue. If you want to play back a song from floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

1. Press the [Song] button. The Song Select screen appears.

fig.07-31.eps

2. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. Choose Favorites if you want to play back a song from user memory, choose Ext Memory if you want to play back a song from USB memory, or choose Disk if you want to play back a song from floppy disk.

3. Touch < > < > to select the song that you wish to play back.

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute)

157

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 158

4. Touch to load the song. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm. If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 159).

5. Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing the button. When you play back the performance, track buttons that are not lighted will be muted (silenced).

fig.07-14-3.eps

6. Press the track button once again (button lights). The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard.

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Performance Data Created with a Music ATELIER

Track button Channel

Rhythm 10

Accomp 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

Bass 2

Lower 3

Upper 4

Solo 1

Track button Track Mute button

Rhythm 10, 11 (Drums/SFX), 13 (Manual Percussion)

Accomp 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15

Bass 2 (Bass)

Lower 3 (Lower)

Upper 4 (Upper)

Solo 1 (Solo)

158

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 159

All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm. You can mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

2. Touch < > a number of times. The Track Mute screen appears. Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display. From the left, these are Track 1, Track 2 ... Track 15, and Track 16.

fig.09-22.eps

3. Touch the screen to select the track that you wish to mute.

fig.09-22-2.eps

The button youve touched goes out, indicating the sound is muted.

4. When you touch an unlit track button, the track button lights up, indicating muting of the track is cancelled.

5. Touch .

Track mute will be cancelled if you choose other performance data.

The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen (p. 154) correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below.

Commercial SMF Music Files

Performance Data Created on the ATELIER

* The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an ATELIER.

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data

Track Mute Button Track Button

1 (Solo) Solo

2 (Pedal) Pedal

3 (Lower) Lower

4 (Upper) Upper

59, 1116 (Accmp) Accomp

10 (Rhythm) Rhythm

Track Mute Button Track Button

1 (Solo) Solo

2 (Pedal) Pedal

3 (Lower) Lower

4 (Upper) Upper

59, 12, 14, 15 (Accmp) Accomp

10 (Rhythm)

Rhythm11 (Drums/SFX)

13 (Manual Percussion)

NOTE

159

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 160

You can display the notations of performances from SMF music files and recordings made on the ATELIER. This is very convenient when you want to read the music as you play and to confirm recorded songs.

Selecting Songs

There is no need to select the song when displaying notations for performances recorded with the Composer. Start from Step 6.

1. Prepare the USB memory or floppy disk that contains the song for which you want to view the notation. If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue. If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

2. Press the [Song] button. The Song Select screen appears.

fig.07-31-2.eps

3. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to view the notation for a song in user memory, select Favorites. If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, select Ext Memory. If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, select Disk.

4. Touch < > < > to select the song whose notation is to be displayed.

5. Touch . After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen appears.

Displaying Notations

6. Touch on the Rec/Play screen. The Notation screen appears.

fig.07-38.eps

Viewing a Notation

Display Description

Enlarge the notation display.

Display lyrics in the notation.

Display the Bass part notation.

Display the Lower part notation.

Display the Upper part notation.

Display the Upper part and Lower part notations.

You can change the part that is displayed, and change the way in which the notation is displayed (p. 161).

160

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 161

1. Touch on the Main Screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-1.eps

2. Touch . The Notation screen appears.

fig.07-38.eps

3. Touch

fig.07-39.eps

fig.07-40.eps

4. Touch the value setting button for the item whose setting you want to change.Changing the Notation Settings

Menu Setting Description

Pitches

OFF Not displayed

C,D,E Letter names (fixed do) are display in the detailed notation.

Do,Re,Mi Solmization syllables (movable do) are displayed in the detailed notation.

Clef Upper

AUTO Display is switched automatically.

G Clef Displayed the G-clef staff of the upper part.

F Clef Displayed the F-clef staff of the upper part.

Clef Lower

AUTO Display is switched automatically.

G Clef Displayed the G-clef staff of the lower part.

F Clef Displayed the F-clef staff of the lower part.

Key

AUTO Key is switched automatically.

Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, F, C, G, D, A, E, B, F#, Bbm, Fm, Cm, Gm, Dm, Am, Em, Bm, F#m, C#m, G#m, D#m

Display the notation in the selected key.

Upper Part 116 Select the part to be displayed as the upper part.

Lower Part 116 Select the part to be displayed as the lower part.

Bass Part 116 Select the part to be displayed as the bass part.

161

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 162

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting. fig.07-42.eps

When you touch Key setting button, the following screen appears.

fig.07-41-1.eps

fig.07-41-2.eps

The Key screen is composed of two screens. Touch

< > to switch between the two screens.

6. Touch .

Some Notes on a Notation Screen

When you start playback of music files, the marks appears. While this appears on the notation, the ATELIER is reading data. Please wait until reading of the data is complete.

In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.

The notations that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music. Because of this, you may find that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music. The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.

If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use

If you use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song may be played back from the beginning.

162

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 163

You can record the performance that you play. You can also record your performance while playing Rhythms or Automatic Accompaniment. fig.07-12.eps

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.

2. Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button. The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

3. Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording. When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the [Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync Start] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.

4. Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have completed your recording. The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light. When you press the [Intro/Ending] button (or [Start/ Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop] button to stop recording.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 121).

You can also choose to cancel the metronome count-in before recording starts (p. 207).

Caution

If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected from the USB memory or floppy disk, the selected song will be completely loaded into the ATELIER and the Composer will enter into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use the following procedure.

1. Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording standby.

2. Disconnect the external media. If youve connected USB memory, disconnect the USB memory from the external memory connector. If youre using a floppy disk, remove the floppy disk from the disk drive.

3. Delete the performance data (p. 167). Re-record your performance.

fig.07-12-2.eps

If the following screen appears

fig.E-30.eps

When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached.

Recording a Performance

23, 4

163

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 164

Heres how to play back a performance youve recorded. fig.07-08-2.eps*

1. Touch on the Main screen. ig.05-08.eps

The Rec/Play screen appears. fig.07-04-2.eps

2. Touch . The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1. If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the song, touch to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback.

3. Touch to begin playback. After playback reaches the end of the performance, it will stop automatically.

You can also begin playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

4. To stop playback at any point, touch .

You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 121).

You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect the playback and what you play while ATELIER music file is being played back (p. 200).

If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back, you may find, when playing Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment, that the music doesnt sound quite like it should (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If you want the data to be played back accurately, first press the [Reset] button prior to playback.

In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song, you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song. Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called Count In.

1. Hold down the [Reset] button and press the [Play/Stop] button. The metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

Playing Back a Performance Song

Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In)

NOTE

164

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 165

In this method, each part (track button) is recorded one after another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. If there are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to them as you record additional parts.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

3. Touch and to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording. If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch .

4. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded will light.

fig.07-15.eps

Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/ Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the Composer [Rec] button.

5. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording. When you touch in the Rec/Play screen, the metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin. As you listen to the performance song previously recorded, record the Part into a new Track.

You can also start recording by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording. The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

7. Repeat steps 36 to record each part.

Recording Each Part Separately

blink

165

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 166

If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in the track.

If you wish to re-record with different settings for voices, tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 167) and re-record again. If the Control track still contains data from before you re-recorded, the volume or sounds may change during playback.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

2. Touch and to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording. If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch .

3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode. and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.

fig.07-15.eps

Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/ Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

4. Touch the Track button which you wish to re- recording (button flashes). The song data of the specified Track (with the exception of the Control Track) will be erased as new song data is recorded.

When the Track button is lit constantly, no song data has been recorded on that Track.

5. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording. The metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.

You can also start recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording. The track buttons which were re-recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit.

You can also stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and record only the panel operations, you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being recorded (p. 199).

You can use punch-in recording (p. 174) to re-record only the area that you specify.

Re-Recording

NOTE

blinklit

NOTE

166

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 167

If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you must erase the previously-recorded data.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-22-2.eps

3. Touch . The following message, asking you to confirm your choice, will be displayed.

fig.E-62.eps

If you touch , the performance data will not be erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

4. If you touch , the performance data will be erased.

A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that you record. However, at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-22-2.eps

Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear)

Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename)

You can also use the following method to open the Song Clear screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [Song] button. The Song Clear screen appears.

167

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 168

3. Touch . The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

fig.07-23.eps

4. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-24.eps

5. Touch . The Rename screen appears.

fig.07-25.eps

6. Touch the character select button ( ) to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ symbols. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase...

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

To cancel operation, touch .

8. When youre done making the settings, touch . The new name is now inserted.

fig.07-26.eps

You cannot directly change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a USB memory or floppy disk. The song must first be loaded (p. 170) into the instrument, edited, and then saved to USB memory or floppy disk again.

Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

Symbols ! # % & ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Deletes a character.

Inserts a space (blank).

Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

NOTE

You can also access the Rename screen as follows.

1. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rec/Play screen. The Utility screen appears.

2. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

3. Touch on the Edit Menu screen. The Rename screen appears.

168

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 169

The performance data that you recorded will disappear when the power of the ATELIER is turned off. If you wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a USB memory, floppy disk, or Favorites (user memory). If the recorded performance data has not been saved, the

display will show the symbol. This symbol will disappear when you save the performance data.

1. Prepare to save the performance song. If you want to save performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector. If you want to save performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04-2.eps

3. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-22-2.eps

4. Touch . The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

fig.07-28-2.eps

5. Touch < > < > to select the save- destination media. Select Ext Memory to save the data in USB memory, select Disk to save it on a floppy disk, or Favorites to save it in user memory.

6. Touch < > < > to select the number of the save destination. If the save destination contains no data, the screen will indicate - - - - -.

fig.07-28-2.eps

To cancel the Save operation, touch to close the Song Save/Song Delete screen.

7. Touch . The Save Format screen appears.

fig.07-29.eps

Saving Performance Songs

169

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 170

8. Touch the screen to select the format in which the data will be saved. You can select either Original or SMF format.

9. Touch to finalize the save format. Saving of the performance data will begin.

Performance data saved by the ATELIER cannot be played back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not a member of the ATELIER series.

Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a longer time than saving it in ATELIER format (Original).

If the Following Screen Appears

If you select a number at which a performance data has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears. fig.E-64-b.eps

If you wish to update the contents of the performance data

1. Touch .

If you want to save your performance as new data without overwriting the existing data

1. Touch to stop the Save operation.

2. In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select the number that is displayed as ----- (a number that currently does not contain performance data).

3. Touch . When saving is complete, the saved performance name will be displayed.

To edit (p. 179) or re-record a performance song that is stored on a USB memory or floppy disk, you must first load that song into the instrument.

1. Prepare the performance song. If you want to load performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector. If you want to load performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

4. Touch . The Song Select screen appears.

fig.07-31.eps

5. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to load a song from USB memory, choose Ext Memory. If you want to load a song from floppy disk, choose Disk.

6. Touch < > < > to select the performance song that you wish to load into internal memory.

Display Description

Original Save data in ATELIER format

SMF Saving in SMF Format for ATELIER Sound Modules

NOTE

NOTE

Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER

170

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 171

7. Touch . fig.07-31.eps

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.

If the Following Screen Appears

The message below is shown when the performance song in the unit has not been saved to USB memory or Favorites (User Memory). fig.E-62.eps

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch .

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch . Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 169).

If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been reached, the following message will be displayed: fig.E-30.eps

You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a Favorites, USB memory, or floppy disk.

If you want to delete a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue. If you want to delete a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

fig.07-23.eps

4. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to delete a song from the user memory, choose Favorites. If you want to delete a song from USB memory, choose Ext Memory. If you want to delete a song from floppy disk, choose Disk.

5. Touch < > < > to select the performance data that you wish to delete.

Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Favorites or the USB Memory

171

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 172

6. Touch . The confirmation message appears.

fig.07-30.eps

If you touch the performance data will not be deleted, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

7. When you touch the performance data will be deleted.

You can load commercially available SMF music files into the ATELIER, and record your own performance on top of it. During recording, the data youve loaded will be played back, while you record your performance.

1. Prepare the SMF music files. If youre using SMF music files from USB memory, connect it to the external memory connector. If youre using SMF music files from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

4. Touch . The Song Select screen appears.

fig.07-31.eps

5. Touch < > < > to select the desired media. If you want to play SMF music files from User Memory, choose Favorites. If you want to play SMF music files from USB memory, choose Ext Memory. If you want to play SMF music files from floppy disk, choose Disk.

6. Touch < > < > to select the SMF music files that you wish to load into internal memory.

Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files

172

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 173

7. Touch . fig.07-31.eps

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory. For track assignments of SMF format performance data loaded to the ATELIER, refer to p. 158.

8. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.

9. Touch and to move to the desired measure (bar) at which you wish to begin recording.

10.In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode. and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light. Also, the panel [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.

11.Touch the Track button which you wish to recording (button flashes).

12.In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording. As you record, the music file that was loaded into the ATELIER will play back.

13.In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording. The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also start and stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

The performance data you recorded can be saved on a USB memory, Favorites, or floppy disk (p. 169).

Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the ATELIER, but for reasons of copyright protection, cannot be saved in SMF format.

1. Prepare the performance data whose tempo you want to change. If youre using performance data from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector. If youre using performance data from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

2. Load the performance data into the unit (p. 170).

3. Determine the tempo with the Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons.

4. Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the [Rec] button. The tempo of the performance data will change.

You cannot carry out this operation with and in the Rec/Play screen.

Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song

NOTE

NOTE

173

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 174

After you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a specified portion of the performance. With this method, you listen to the recorded performance, and re-record just the desired area. This recording method is called Punch-in Recording.

To Specify the Segment to be Recorded Over Again

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Punch In/Out screen appears.

fig.07-33.eps

4. Touch the From value (the measure at which recording will begin).

fig.07-34.eps

5. Touch < > < > to specify From (the measure at which recording will begin).

6. Touch .

7. Touch the For value (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).

8. Touch < > < > to set For (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).

9. Touch .

10.Touch . The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

To Record While Listening to the Song

11.Press the Track button which you wish to re- record (indicator flashes).

12.Touch to begin recording. When you touch , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins. When you reach the first measure of the specified area, recording will begin. When the specified area ends, recording will end, and playback will resume.

While the song is playing back or recording, the [Rec] buttons indicator will be lit as follows.

When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back, the [Rec] buttons indicator will resume flashing.

13.Touch to stop the recording. The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light.

Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording)

[Rec] buttons indicator Description

Flash While the performance is playing back

Light constantly While you are re-recording

174

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 175

You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the Rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type of recording is called Loop Recording. This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part.

Loop Recording can be used only when recording the Rhythm part.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual Percussion] button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect Set (p. 66p. 69).

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch and on the Rec/Play screen, move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording.

4. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-22.eps

5. Touch . The Loop Rec screen appears.

fig.07-35.eps

6. Touch the For value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

fig.07-36.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

7. Touch < > < > to specify the For value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

8. Touch .

9. Touch . The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

10.Touch to begin recording. When you touch , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins. You can record repeatedly over the specified range of measures, adding additional notes at each pass.

11.Touch to stop playback. The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded the performance will light.

Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording)

NOTE

175

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 176

This setting (ON/OFF) determines whether or not a metronome count-in (2 measures) will be heard after pressing the [Play/Stop] button on recording.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.07-04.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.07-22.eps

3. Touch . fig.03-37.eps

4. Touch < > < > to display the Count-In Rec.

5. Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to switch it between ON/OFF. Each time you touch the Count-In Rec setting, it will alternate between ON/OFF.

6. Touch .

Starting Recording at the Right Moment (Count-In Recording)

Setting Description

ON A two-measure count will sound before recording

OFF No count will sound before recording

176

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

R ecording/P

laying B ack W

hat Y ou P

lay

AT-500_e.book 177

Performance songs and SMF music files from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to Favorites (user memory). If a performance song saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in Favorites, the stored performance song will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used performance song into Favorites. Performance songs saved in Favorites can also be copied to USB memory or floppy disk.

Copying Performance Songs from USB Memory to Favorites

1. Connecting the USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

4. Touch . The Song Select screen appears.

5. Touch . The Song File Edit screen appears.

6. Touch (Song Copy). The following screen appears.

7. Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the performance song you want to copy). If you want to copy a performance song from USB memory, select Ext Memory. If you want to copy a performance song from floppy disk, select Disk.

8. Touch < > < > to select the performance song you want to copy.

If you choose , all performance data stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.

9. Touch Favorites < > < > to select the copy-destination number. Numbers for which a song name is shown already have a song saved to them.

10.Touch . The copying of the song to Favorites begins. When copying ends, the - - - - - in the screen will change to the song name that you copied.

If you select a number in which a song is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.

If you want to delete the previously saved song and overwrite it with the song youre newly saving, touch . If you dont want to delete the previously saved song, touch , then select a number at which no song has been saved, and copy the song to that number.

Copying Performance Song

177

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

AT-500_e.book 178

Copying Performance Songs from Favorites to USB Memory

You can copy performance song from Favorites to USB memory. In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Song File Copy screen in step 6 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, youll be copying performance song from Favorites to USB memory.

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying performance song from USB memory to Favorites.

178

AT-500_e.book 179

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

E diting Y

our M usical P

erform ance D

ata

Song files that you record can be edited using five different functions.

The following editing functions are provided.

Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend that you save your song to a USB memory before you edit it (p. 169).

You can delete a portion of the performance data. This function lets you delete specified measures (bars) of the song from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted, subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap. Example: To delete measures (bars) 58 fig.08-01.eps

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.08-02.eps

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

fig.08-03.eps0

3. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

fig.08-08.eps

4. Touch . fig.08-04-2.eps

The Delete Measure screen appears. fig.08-04-a.eps

Menu Description Page

Delete Measure Deleting a Specific Measure. p. 179

Delete Track Delete the Recording from a Track.

p. 180

Erase Event Erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area.

p. 182

Copy Copying Measures. p. 184

Quantize Correct Timing Inaccuracies. p. 185

Rename Change the name of the performance data.

p. 167

Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)

NOTE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6

179

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

AT-500_e.book 180

5. Touch the From value (the first measure that you wish to delete).

6. Touch < > < > to set From (the first measure that you wish to delete).

fig.08-05.eps

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch the For value (the number of measures that you wish to delete).

9. Touch < > < > to set For (the number of measures that you wish to delete). To delete to the last measure, select ALL.

10.When youre done making the settings, touch .

11.Touch . The following display appears.

fig.08-06.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

12.Touch to delete the measures. When deletion has been completed, you are returned to the Delete Measure screen.

The ATELIER has seven tracks. This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify.

For more on the content stored on each track, refer to p. 154.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.08-02.eps

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

fig.08-03.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

fig.08-08-a.eps

Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track)

180

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

E diting Y

our M usical P

erform ance D

ata

AT-500_e.book 181

4. Touch . fig.08-08.eps

The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a track) screen appears.

fig.08-08-2.eps

5. Touch the Track value (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).

6. Touch < > < > to select the Track (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).

fig.08-09.eps

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch . The following display appears.

fig.08-22.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

9. Touch to delete the performance data. When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track screen will reappear.

Setting

RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

181

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

AT-500_e.book 182

You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area without making the song shorter. This is called the Erase function. As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents of the performance.

Example: Erasing measures (bars) 58 fig.08-10.eps

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.08-02.eps

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

fig.08-03.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

fig.08-08-a.eps

4. Touch . fig.08-11-2.eps

The Erase Event screen appears. fig.08-11.eps

Erase Recording (Erase Event)

Setting Description

ALL All recording

NOTE Notes played on the keyboard

PANEL

Panel operations, Content Saved to the Control Track (Information Other than Expression, Voice, and Tempo Data) Refer to p. 154.

EXPRESSION Expression pedal recording

VOICE Voice settings

TEMPO Tempo setting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

blank measures

182

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

E diting Y

our M usical P

erform ance D

ata

AT-500_e.book 183

5. Touch the Event value (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).

6. Touch < > < > to specify the Event (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).

fig.08-12.eps

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch the Track value (the track from which data will be erased).

9. Touch < > < > to specify the Track (the track from which data will be erased). If you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased, you need not specify the track.

If you select ALL, the recording will be erased from all parts.

10.When youre done making the settings, touch .

11.Touch the From value (the measure at which erasure will begin).

12.Touch < > < > to set From (the measure at which erasure will begin).

13.When youre done making the settings, touch .

14.Touch the For value (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).

15.Touch < > < > to set For (the number of measures from which the data will be erased). If you wish to erase to the last measure (bar), set for: ALL.

16.When youre done making the settings, touch .

17.Touch . The following display appears.

fig.08-23.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

18.Touch to erase the performance data. Once the performance data has been erased, you are returned to the Erase Event screen.

Setting

ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE, TEMPO

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

183

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

AT-500_e.book 184

This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure (bar) location in the same track. If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be erased. Example: To copy measures (bars) 57 to measure (bar) 8 fig.08-13.eps

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.08-02.eps

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

fig.08-03.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

fig.08-08-a.eps

4. Touch . fig.08-14-2.eps

The Copy screen appears. fig.08-14.eps

5. Touch the Track value (the track to be copied).

6. Touch < > < > to set Track (the track to be copied).

fig.08-15-2.eps

If you select ALL, the recording in all the tracks will be copied.

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch the From value (the measure at which copying will begin).

Copying Measures (Copy)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

184

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

E diting Y

our M usical P

erform ance D

ata

AT-500_e.book 185

9. Touch < > < > to set From (the measure at which copying will begin).

10.When youre done making the settings, touch .

11.Touch the For value (the number of measures to be copied).

12.Touch < > < > to set For (the number of measures to be copied). If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure, select ALL.

13.When youre done making the settings, touch .

14.Touch the To value (the copy-destination measure number).

15.Touch < > < > to set To (the copy- destination measure number). If you select END, the data will be copied following the end of the last measure.

16.When youre done making the settings, touch .

17.Touch the Time value (the number of times that the data will be copied).

18.Touch < > < > to set Time (the number of times that the data will be copied).

19.When youre done making the settings, touch .

20.Touch . The following display appears.

fig.08-24.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

21.Touch to copy the measures. Once the measures have been copied, you are returned to the Copy screen.

You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify. This is called Quantizing. For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note timing, the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise quarter- note intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-note timing, you can correctly match the Rhythms.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

fig.08-02.eps

2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

fig.08-03.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . The Edit Menu screen appears.

fig.08-08_50

Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize)

185

Editing Your Musical Performance Data

AT-500_e.book 186

4. Touch . fig.08-17-2.eps

The Quantize screen appears. fig.08-17.eps

5. Touch the Track value (the track that will be quantized).

6. Touch < > < > to specify the Track (the track that will be quantized).

fig.08-18.eps

If you select ALL, the recording in all the tracks will be quantized.

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

8. Touch the From value (the measure at which quantization will begin).

9. Touch < > < > to set From (the measure at which quantization will begin).

10.When youre done making the settings, touch .

11.Touch the For value (the number of measures that will be quantized).

12.Touch < > < > to set For (the number of measures that will be quantized). To specify everything through to the last measure, set for: ALL.

13.When youre done making the settings, touch .

14.Touch the Resolution value (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).

15.Touch the screen to set Resolution (the resolution at which notes will be aligned). The Resolution (the timing to which notes are aligned) can be set to one of the following settings.

fig.08-20.eps

16.When youre done making the settings, touch .

17.Touch . The following display appears.

fig.08-25.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

18.Touch to have the quantization carried out. When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the Quantize screen.

Track

ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO

Quarter note tripletHalf note

8th note

Quarter note

8th note triplet 16th note

16 note triplet 32th note

186

AT-500_e.book 187

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

You can create a Rhythm for use when Rhythm Mode is set to S-SERIES (p. 203).

An original Rhythm of your own is created by starting with one of the internal Rhythms, then modifying it. You can edit some of the internal Rhythms to create your own original Rhythms. These original Rhythms are called User Rhythms. This function is called Rhythm Customize.

Process for Creating User Rhythms fig.RC_steps.eps

Creating the User Rhythm

Open the Rhythm Customize screen

Select the division

Load the source Rhythm

Make the division settings

Edit the Rhythm

Change the percussion

Save the User Rhythm to the User Memory or USB Memory

Copy User Rhythm on USB Memory to the User Memory Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the USB Memory

Saving the User Rhythm

Changing the name of a User Rhythm

Copying the User Rhythm

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

Change the Rhythm tempo

187

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

AT-500_e.book 188

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

fig.02-09.eps

2. In the Rhythm screen, touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.02-10.eps

3. Touch . The Rhythm Customize screen appears.

When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen

When calling up a source

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen

3

7

9 10 11 12 13

8

54

6

4

21

1 Rhythm Name

2 Beat

3 Division Name (p. 189)

4 button

Switches the page when the Rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages.

5 (Zoom Out/Zoom In) button

Expands (zooms in) and reduces (zooms out) the Rhythm pattern display.

6 Current location (Measure: Beat: Tick)

7 Instrument Name Indicates the name of the instrument used in the Rhythm.

8 Rhythm Pattern Display Displays the notes in the selected Rhythm pattern.

9 (Utility) button

Displays the menu with settings for the Rhythm Customize function.

10 (Preview) button Allows you to listen to the created Rhythm.

11 (Delete) button Deletes the Rhythm in the displayed measure.

12 (Copy) button

Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.

13

button When more than eight different instruments are used in a Rhythm, press these buttons to switch through the instrument names.

14 Scroll Bar This indicates the position of the current measure in the overall Rhythm.

3

7

9 10 11 12 13

8

54

6

4

2114

188

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

AT-500_e.book 189

What is the Division?

A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody A, melody B, bridge and ending. With the ATELIER, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song Divisions.

You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the Divisions.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

fig.RC-01.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.RC-02.eps

3. Touch

(Division Select). fig.RC-03.eps

You can open the Division Select screen by touching the Division name indication (p. 188) in the Rhythm Customize screen.

4. Touch a Division name to select the Division. fig.RC-04.eps

This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm Customize screen.

You can touch < > to hear how the Rhythm

sounds.

Selecting the Division

Division Performance division

Intro The intro is played at the start of a song.

Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern.

Fill In To Variation

This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more lively. After the phrase is played, the variations accompaniment pattern is played.

Variation This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It is a variation on an Original.

Fill In To Original

This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more sedate. After the phrase is played, the originals accompaniment pattern is played.

Ending This is played at the end of a song.

189

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

AT-500_e.book 190

Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the Rhythm you want to use as the base for the Rhythm you are creating.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

fig.RC-01.eps

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.RC-02.eps

3. Touch . The Rhythm Load screen appears.

fig.RC-05-1.eps

4. Touch Group/Media < > < > to select Rhythm group.

fig.RC-06.eps

5. Touch < > < > to switch the screen, then touch a Rhythm name to select the Rhythm.

fig.RC-05-2.eps

You can touch to hear how the Rhythm sounds.

6. Touch Division < > < > to select the Division you want to call up. Selecting ALL calls up all of the Divisions.

7. Use the Variation buttons of the panel to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.

8. Touch . The Rhythm is called up, and the Rhythm Customize screen returns to the display.

Loading the Rhythm

190

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

AT-500_e.book 191

Independent Drum Set, Beat, and Volume settings can be made for each Division.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch

(Division Options). The Division Options screen appears.

Changing the Drum Set

4. Touch the value set for Drum Set. fig.RC-12-1.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch . The Division Options screen reappears.

Changing the Beat

7. Touch the Beat setting. fig.RC-12-2.eps

8. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

9. Touch . The Division Options screen reappears.

Changing the Volume

10.Touch the Volume setting. fig.RC-12-3.eps

11.Touch < > < > to change the setting.

12.Touch . The Division Options screen reappears.

Making the Division Settings

191

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

AT-500_e.book 192

Edit the internal Rhythm.

Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch (to copy the selected measure). fig.RC-10.eps

The following screen appears. fig.RC-13.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

3. Touch . Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.

Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch (to copy the selected measure). fig.RC-10.eps

The following screen appears. fig.RC-14.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

3. Touch . The selected measure is deleted.

Creating the User Rhythm

Editing the Rhythm

What you can do Page

Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 192

Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 192

Erasing Sounds p. 193

Adding Sounds p. 193

Altering Voices p. 194

Changing the Velocity p. 194

Moving Sounds p. 194

192

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

AT-500_e.book 193

Editing the Sounds

You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the velocity.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188). fig.RC-10.eps

2. Touch the point on the screen where the sound you want to edit is located. When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move along with your finger.

fig.RC-15-2.eps

The information on the location (Measure: Beat: Tick) of the line on the screen is displayed. When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed.

fig.RC-16.eps

You can touch < > to open the Utility screen, and

then touch in the Utility screen to open the Note

Edit screen.

Erasing Sounds

3. Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to erase the sound.

fig.RC-16.eps

4. When you touch , the selected sound is erased.

Adding Sounds

5. Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to add the sound.

fig.RC-16.eps

6. When you touch , the new sound is added after the selected sound.

193

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

AT-500_e.book 194

Altering Voices

7. Touch < > < > to select the sound whose voice you want to change.

8. Touch the Instrument name. fig.RC-17.eps

9. Touch <-8> <-1> <+1> <+8> to switch the voice.

Changing the Velocity

10.Touch < > < > to select the sound whose velocity you want to change.

11.Touch the Velocity setting. fig.RC-18.eps

12.Touch <-10> <-1> <+1> <+10> to change the velocity.

Moving Sounds

13.Touch < > < > to select the sound you want to move.

14.Touch the Meas Beat Tick setting. The note-location display uses Measure: Beat: Tick as the format. A tick is a unit of time thats shorter than a beat.

fig.RC-16.eps

15.Touch <-30> <-1> <+1> <+30> to move the sound.

With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are expressed in terms of Measure: Beat: Tick. One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be indicated as shown below.

Quarter Note 8th Note fig.RC_tick-01.eps

8th Note Triplet 16th Note fig.RC_tick-03.eps, fig.RC_tick-02.eps

The ticks for each note have the following characteristics.

NOTE TICKS

Quarter Note 0 (Every 120 ticks)

8th Note 0, 60 (Every 60 ticks)

8th Note Triplet 0, 40, 80 (Every 40 ticks)

16the Note 0, 30, 60, 90 (Every 30 ticks)

(1 measure: 1 beat: 0 tick)

1: 1: 0 1: 2: 0 1: 3: 0 1: 4: 0 1: 1: 0 1: 1: 60 1: 2: 0 1: 2: 60

1: 1: 0 1: 1: 40 1: 1: 80

3

1: 1: 0 1: 1: 30 1: 1: 60 1: 1: 90

194

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

AT-500_e.book 195

You can change an instrument used in a Rhythm and replace it with another instrument.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen where the instrument names are displayed.

fig.RC-10.eps

The Instrument Edit screen appears. fig.RC-20.eps

Changing the Instrument Used

3. Touch < > < > in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to change.

4. Touch . The following screen appears.

5. Touch < > < > to switch the screen, then touch the instrument name. The following screen appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

6. If you want to change the instrument, touch . The instrument is changed.

Deleting an Instrument

You can delete an instrument used in a Rhythm. When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the Rhythm.

7. Touch < > < > in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to delete.

8. Touch on the Instrument Edit screen. fig.DelInstrumentOK?.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

9. If you are sure that you wish to delete the instrument, touch . The selected instrument is deleted.

Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used

You can open Instrument Edit screen using the following procedure.

1. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears. fig.RC-11.eps

2. Touch (Instrument Edit). The Instrument Edit screen appears.

195

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

AT-500_e.book 196

This deletes User Rhythms created by partially editing the internal Rhythms.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.RC-11.eps

3. Touch . The following screen appears.

fig.RC-23.eps

To cancel operation, touch .

4. If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm, touch .

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rhythm Save screen appears.

fig.RC-19.eps

4. Touch . The Rename screen appears.

fig.RC-24.eps

5. Touch the character select button ( ) to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ symbols. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase...

6. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

To cancel operation, touch .

7. When youre done making the settings, touch .

Deleting Rhythms You Have Created

Saving the User Rhythm

Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename)

Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

Symbols ! # % & ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Deletes a character.

Inserts a space (blank).

Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

196

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

C reating O

riginal A ccom

panim ent R

hythm s

AT-500_e.book 197

You can take User Rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the ATELIERs User memory and USB memory. To call up Rhythms saved in User memory, press the [User] button.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

fig.RC-11.eps

3. Touch . The Rhythm Save screen appears.

fig.RC-19.eps

4. Touch < > < > to determine the save destination. Select Ext Memory to save the data in USB memory, or Favorites to save it in user memory. Select Disk to save the data in floppy disk.

5. Touch < > < > to select the number of the save destination.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as - - - - -.

fig.RC-19-2.eps

To cancel the save, touch to close the Rhythm Save screen. You can change the name of a Rhythm by touching .

6. Touch . The User Rhythms are saved to the User memory or to USB memory.

You can save Rhythms after changing the tempo by touching the Tempo [ ] [ ] button.

If the following screen appears

The following screen appears if you select a number to which a Rhythm has already been saved and then touch . fig.OverwriteRhythmOK?.eps

If you wish to overwrite the Rhythm

1. Touch . The Rhythm will be rewritten.

If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Rhythm

1. Touch . Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.

2. In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number that is displayed as ----- (a number that currently does not contain Rhythm data).

3. Touch .

Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory

197

19

AT-500_e.book 198

Various Other Settings

This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied. Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch either , or .

3. Touch < > < > to display the Initial Touch. fig.09-03.eps

4. Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 110).

5. Touch < > < > to edit the value.

6. Touch .

You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Pedalboard screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the PedalBass Mode.

fig.09-04.eps

4. Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch between MONOPHONIC and POLYPHONIC. Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will alternate between MONOPHONIC and POLYPHONIC.

5. Touch .

Adjusting How the Instrument Responds Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity

Setting Description

Upper To change the initial touch setting of the Upper part

Lower To change the initial touch setting of the Lower part

Setting Description

110

Initial Touch is on. Striking the keys more forcefully will produce correspondingly louder sounds. The change in volume when the keys are played forcefully increases as the value is increased.

OFF Initial Touch is off. Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play.

Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony

Setting Description

MONOPHONIC Only single notes can be played.

POLYPHONIC Multiple notes can be played.

8

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 199

You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you press the Damper (Sustain) pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Damper Pedal.

fig.09-08.eps

4. Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch between to UPPER and to LOWER. Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will alternate between to UPPER and to LOWER.

5. Touch .

Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files are being played back.

Function During Recording

Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Src (Rec).

fig.09-10.eps

4. Touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting to switch between PEDAL and COMPOSER. Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will alternate between PEDAL and COMPOSER.

5. Touch .

Performance Function Settings

Selecting the Keyboard Affected by the Damper Pedal

Setting Description

to UPPER The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.

to LOWER The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal

Setting Description

PEDAL Expression Pedal movements will be recorded. The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded.

COMPOSER Expression Pedal movements will not be recorded. The previous data will remain without being erased.

199

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 200

Function During Playback

You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Src (Play).

fig.09-10.eps

4. Touch the Exp. Src (Play) setting. fig.09-12.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Bender/ Vibrato.

fig.09-10.eps

4. Touch the Bender/Vibrato setting. fig.09-13.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

Setting Description

PEDAL +COMPOSER

The Expression Pedal will function. Expression Pedal recording within the song file will also be effective.

COMPOSER The Expression Pedal will not function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be effective.

PEDAL The Expression Pedal will function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be ignored.

Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply

Setting Description

to UPPER The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.

to LOWER The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

to PEDAL The effect is applied to the voices played on the Pedalboard.

200

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 201

This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The range can be set anywhere between 112 (in semitone units; with a maximum of one octave).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the Pitch Bend Range.

fig.09-14.eps

4. Touch the Pitch Bend Range setting. fig.09-15.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this setting.

You can adjust the sensitivity of the D Beam controller. Increasing this setting will make the D Beam controller more responsive. The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on the brightness of the surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, please readjust the sensitivity.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch . The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to display the D Beam Sensitivity.

fig.09-14.eps

4. Touch the D Beam Sensitivity setting. fig.09-15.eps

5. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Pitch Bend Range

Setting

112 (semitone steps)

NOTE

Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller

Setting

110

201

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 202

The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF. When Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the key to play a new chord.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Chord Hold. fig.02-11.eps

5. Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will alternate between ON and OFF.

6. Touch .

You can change the sound that is used for the count played at the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p. 78).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Count Down Sound.

fig.02-11.eps

5. Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch between VOICE and STICK. Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it will alternate between VOICE and STICK.

6. Touch .

Rhythm Settings

Turning Chord Hold On/Off

Setting Description

ON The Automatic Accompaniment determined by the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held (even if you release the keys).

OFF

When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard, the Automatic Accompaniment will stop (be muted). Only the Rhythm (drum) performance will continue.

Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound)

Setting Description

VOICE Human voice count (One, two, three...)

STICK Stick sound count

202

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 203

You can prevent Rhythm tempos from switching automatically when you switch Rhythms.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo).

fig.02-11-2.eps

5. Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will alternate between ON and OFF.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill In [Break] button so that they work in the same way as on the S-series.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Rhythm Mode.

fig.02-11-2.eps

5. Touch the Rhythm Mode setting to switch between ORIGINAL and S-SERIES. Each time you touch the Rhythm Mode setting, it will alternate between ORIGINAL and S-SERIES.

6. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically

Setting Description

ON Switching the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped automatically changes the tempo settings to those in the new Rhythm.

OFF The tempo settings are not changed automatically when the Rhythms are changed.

Changing the Operation of the Fill In Buttons

Setting Description

ORIGINAL The function of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill In [Break] button will not change.

S-SERIES

The function of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill In [Break] button will change.

Fill In [Auto] button Fill In [To Variation] button

Fill In [Break] button Fill In [To Original] button

203

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 204

Placing the Panel Overlay Sheet

If youve set Rhythm Mode to S-SERIES, you can place the panel overlay sheet included with the ATELIER on the panel so that the button functions will be easy to see.

1. Place the panel overlay sheet on Fill In buttons as shown in the illustration below.

On the panel overlay sheet are printed the names of the buttons for when Rhythm Mode is set to S-SERIES.

Starting the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is S-SERIES)

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Starting with a short intro

1. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or Fill In [To Original] button. [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink. The indicator for the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.

2. Press the [Start/Stop] button. A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

Stopping the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is S-SERIES)

Stopping with an Ending

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops. While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Stopping the Rhythm with a short ending

1. Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then press the [Start/Stop] button. A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

Stopping without an Ending

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Button Description

Fill In [To Variation] button

A fill-in (p. 79) will be played, and then an elaborate Rhythm pattern will play.

Fill In [To Original] button

A fill-in (p. 79) will be played, and then a basic Rhythm pattern will play.

204

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 205

You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Registration Options screen appears.

fig.03-07.eps

4. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between DELAYED and INSTANT. Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT.

5. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Registration Options screen appears.

fig.03-07.eps

4. Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update) setting to switch between DELAYED and INSTANT. Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT.

5. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Registration Settings

Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled

Setting Description

DELAYED

Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds. If you quickly press the Registration button, only the panel settings (voice, etc.) that are not related to Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be updated.

INSTANT

Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled

Setting Description

DELAYED Transpose settings will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds.

INSTANT Transpose setting will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

205

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 206

Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Lyrics. fig.09-16.eps

5. Touch the Lyrics setting to switch between ON and OFF. Touch the setting to toggle the display of lyrics ON (visible) or OFF (hidden).

6. Touch .

If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the lyrics, touch on Rec/Play screen once again.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Playback Transpose.

fig.09-16.eps

5. Touch the Playback Transpose setting. fig.09-17.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting. The key is transposed by one semitone each time

< > or < > key is touched.

7. Touch .

Composer Settings

Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off

NOTE

Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Playback Transpose)

Setting

-605 (semitone steps)

206

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 207

You can change the way in which the metronome will sound.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Metronome. fig.09-16.eps

5. Touch the Metronome setting. fig.09-18.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

7. Touch .

You can adjust the volume of the metronome.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Metronome Vol (Metronome Volume).

fig.09-19.eps

5. Touch Metronome Vol. setting. fig.09-20.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

Increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome.

7. Touch .

Changing the Metronome Setting

Setting Description

OFF Not heard at all

REC Heard only while recording

ON Heard constantly

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Setting

110

207

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 208

You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Metronome Sound.

fig.09-19.eps

5. Touch the Metronome Sound setting. fig.09-21.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

7. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the Beat. fig.09-19.eps

5. Touch the Beat setting. The time signature setting screen appears.

fig.09-19-2.eps

6. Touch the time signature that you wish to set.

7. Touch .

If youre using Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the time signature will be specified automatically.

You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.

Changing the Sound of the Metronome

Setting Description

CLICK&BELL Conventional metronome sound

ELECTRONIC Electronic metronome sound

VOICE ENG. Human voice (English)

VOICE JPN. Human voice (Japanese)

Setting the Beat

NOTE

208

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 209

The ATELIER may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of CD manually.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the CD/Audio Type.

fig.09-16.eps

5. Touch the CD/Audio Type setting. fig.09-18.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the ATELIER.

7. Touch .

Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back Setting Description

Auto The CD type is detected automatically.

Type A General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI data, and the data format may vary from one CD to the next. If the CDs data format does not match the ATELIERs settings, a beep will sound.Type B

STEREO Commercial Audio CD (CDs other than those designed for use with the piano player piano)

NOTE

209

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 210

With some player piano CDs, the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized properly. In such instances, you can adjust the timing of the piano sounds so that they are in time with the accompaniment.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch . The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to display the CD/Audio Sync.

fig.09-16.eps

5. Touch the CD/Audio Sync setting. fig.09-18.eps

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

7. Touch .

The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note. The Master Tune parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the ATELIER.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Master Tune. fig.09-24.eps

3. Touch the Master Tune setting. fig.09-25.eps

4. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

5. Touch .

By touching < >, you can restore the default setting (440.0 Hz).

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Adjusting the Timing of a Player Piano CDs Piano Sound and Accompaniment

Setting

0100

Other Settings

Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)

Setting

415.3Hz466.2Hz (0.1 Hz units)

210

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 211

You can adjust the mic echo that will apply to a connected microphone.

Connecting the Microphone (p. 23)

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Mic Echo. fig.09-24.eps

3. Touch the Mic Echo setting. fig.09-26.eps

4. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

5. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Send PC Switch.

fig.00-37.eps

3. Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will alternate between ON and OFF.

4. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Adjusting the Mic Echo

Setting

012

Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers

Setting Description

ON PC numbers are transmitted

OFF PC numbers are not transmitted

211

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 212

You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out connector when a Registration is selected.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB), Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB), or PC Number (Program Change Number).

fig.00-37.eps

3. Touch either , , or setting.

fig.09-28.eps

4. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

5. Touch .

This instrument contains two sound generators: one for GM2/ GS data playback and one for keyboard performance. Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback. However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the MIDI IN Mode. fig.09-24.eps

3. Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch between MODE 1 and MODE 2. Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will alternate between Mode 1 and Mode 2.

Setting the PC Number

Menu Setting

Bank MSB 0127

Bank LSB 0127

PC Number 1128

MIDI IN Mode

Setting Description

MODE 1 Control the instrument as a GS sound generator

MODE 2

Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12, 14, 15 are transmitted to the GS sound generator, and all other channels are transmitted to the keyboard sound generator.

Channel MODE 1 MODE 2

1 GS Solo

2 GS Pedal/GS *

3 GS Lower

4 GS Upper

510 GS GS

11 GS Drums/SFX

12 GS GS

13 GS Manual Percussion

1415 GS GS

16 GS Control

212

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 213

* When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator.

4. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

When you use the MIDI connectors or the USB connector of the ATELIER to transmit musical data to external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and Pedal) you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages.

For details refer to Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 231).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

fig.09-24.eps

fig.09-30.eps

fig.10-11.eps

2. Touch the part to change the MIDI Transmit Channel.

The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and PC numbers.

3. Touch < > < > to change the setting. fig.09-31-a.eps

4. Touch .

MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel

Menu Part

Tx MIDI Ch. Upper Upper

Tx MIDI Ch. Lower Lower

Tx MIDI Ch. Pedal Pedal

Tx MIDI Ch. Solo Solo

Tx MIDI Ch. Drums Drums/SFX

Tx MIDI Ch. M.Perc Manual Percussion

Tx MIDI Ch. Ctrl Control

Setting

116

NOTE

213

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 214

You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Main Bouncing Ball.

fig.09-44.eps

3. Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch between ON and OFF. Each time you touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting, it will alternate between ON and OFF.

4. Touch .

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

You can change the color and pattern for the main screens background.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Main Background.

fig.09-44.eps

3. Touch the Main Background setting.

4. Touch < > < > to change the setting. fig.10-13.eps

5. Touch . The System screen appears.

6. Touch on the System Screen. The main screen appears with the selected background.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen

Setting Description

ON The bouncing ball appears in the main screen.

OFF The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen.

Switching the Background of the Main Screen

214

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 215

Connecting the ATELIER to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the ATELIER.

V-LINK V-LINK ( ) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.

How to Use the V-LINK

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the V-LINK. fig.10-14.eps

3. Touch the V-LINK setting (OFF/MODE 1/ MODE2).

4. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

5. Touch .

The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

fig.09-41.eps

The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON when V-LINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When the V- LINK function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on.

For more on switching video images, refer to the owners manual for the connected device.

Using the V-LINK Function

Setting Description

OFF The V-LINK function is switched off.

MODE 1 The V-LINK function is switched on. You can now control the video images using the Registration buttons.

MODE 2

The V-LINK function is switched on. You can now control the video images using the twelve rightmost keys of the lower keyboard and Registration buttons. No sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the right end of the keyboard.

When V-LINK is set to MODE 1 When a Registration button is pressed, Bank Select and Program Change Number messages are transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video control messages. At this time, the Control MIDI transmit channel setting is disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

When V-LINK is set to MODE 2 In addition to the functions of MODE 1, MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit Note messages as video control messages from the MIDI Out connector when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower keyboard is pressed. In this case, the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16.NOTE

NOTE

215

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 216

You can use your external display to view the contents of the ATELIERs built-in screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the Screen Out. fig.10-12.eps

3. Touch the Screen Out setting to switch between ON and OFF.

I If the Slide Show setting is on, the slide show will be shown on your external display.

4. Touch .

You can also use the following procedure to turn the V-LINK function on.

1. Hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full] button or the Upper Organ [Jazz] button. Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full] button switches the instrument to MODE 1 (p. 215). Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Jazz] button switches the instrument to MODE 2 (p. 215). The display changes as shown below, and the ATELIER switches to Image Control mode.

fig.09-42.eps

The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

fig.09-41.eps

2. To cancel the V-LINK function, once again hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full] button or the Upper Organ [Jazz] button. If set to MODE 1 (p. 215), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full] button switches the V-LINK function off. If set to MODE 2 (p. 215), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Jazz] button switches the V-LINK function off.

Viewing the Contents of the ATELIERs Screen on a External Display

Setting Description

ON The contents of the ATELIERs screen will be shown on your external display.

OFF The contents of the ATELIERs screen will not be shown on your external display. The ATELIER logo will be shown.

NOTE

216

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 217

If youve been using the Touch Screen for some time, the pointer may be shifted, making the ATELIER react incorrectly. You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration (repositioning).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. In the System screen, touch . The Utility screen appears.

fig.00-38.eps

3. Touch . fig.00-38-2.eps

A display will ask for confirmation. To cancel the operation, touch .

4. Touch on the screen.

5. Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.

Do this carefully, because touching a location thats different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer accurately. If the following display appears, perform the touch panel position adjustment once again.

fig.09-38-2.eps

Repositioning the Touch Screen NOTE

217

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 218

You can restore the User memory to their original factory settings. This function is called User Memory Reset.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

fig.00-37.eps

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

fig.00-38.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . fig.00-43-1.eps

The confirmation message appears on screen. fig.00-43-2.eps

Touch to return to the System screen without resetting the user memory.

4. Touch . The user memory will be reset to the factory-set state.

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress! fig.00-40-2.eps

To reset all settings other than User memory to their original factory settings, refer to p. 219. If you want to reset all settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 24.

Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings

What is User Memory? User Memory refers to an area inside the instrument where you can store the User Rhythms you create and the performances you record. Rhythms and SMF music files saved on USB memory can also be copied to user memory (p. 87). User memory is quite useful, since anything you place there will be retained even while the power is turned off. The following things are stored in User memory:

Songs youve registered in Favorites

Rhythms

Registration sets

NOTE

218

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 219

You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory (p. 218) to their original factory settings. This function is called Panel Reset.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

fig.00-37.eps

2. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

fig.00-38.eps

3. In the Utility screen, touch . fig.00-43-1.eps

The confirmation message appears on screen. fig.00-43-2.eps

If you touch , the Panel Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

4. Touch . The Panel Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress! fig.00-40-2.eps

To reset only the User memory to its original factory settings, refer to p. 218. If you want to reset all settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 24.

You can also use the following method to open the Panel Reset confirmation screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button. The Panel Reset confirmation screen appears.

Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

219

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 220

The process of preparing USB memory or floppy disks so that they can be used with the ATELIER is called initialization (formatting). In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific type of device. If the media format does not match the ATELIERs, you will not be able to use that media with the ATELIER.

1. Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector If you want to initialize a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive (sold separately) to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

3. Touch . The Registration Save screen appears.

4. Touch < > < > to select the media. Choose Ext Memory if you want to initialize USB memory, or choose Disk if you want to initialize a floppy disk.

5. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears.

6. Touch . The Format screen appears.

If you touch , you will return to the Registration Save screen without formatting.

7. Touch to start formatting. When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns.

Never attempt to remove the USB memory until formatting is complete.

The ATELIER allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is turned on.

1. Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following criteria:

2. Using your computer, save the image that you want to load into the ATELIER on external media.

3. Connect the external media containing the image to the ATELIER. If youre using USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector. If youre using a floppy disk, connect the separately purchased floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

4. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

5. In the System screen, touch . fig.00-38.eps

Formatting a USB Memory (Format)

NOTE

Displaying a Graphic at Power-up

Size 800 x 480 pixels

Color 24 bit colors

Format Image saved in BMP format

Name

18 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A filename extension of .BMP must be added after the name.

The following characters can be used to name an image. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ( ) - @ ~ { } _ !

If you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed.

NOTE

220

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 221

6. Touch . The BMP Installer screen appears.

fig.09-34.eps

The ATELIER can store up to three images. If two or more images are stored in internal memory, those images will be displayed consecutively after the power is turned on.

7. In the screen, touch <01><03> to select the destination at which the image is to be saved.

fig.09-35.eps

8. Touch . The following screen appears.

fig.09-36.eps

9. Touch < > < > to select the media. Choose Ext Memory to load an image from USB memory, or choose Disk to load an image from floppy disk. The destination will show the names of the images saved on the external media.

10.Touch < > < > to select the image that you want to load into internal memory.

You can touch to verify the image.

11.Touch . The image will be loaded.

If an image is already stored at the load destination, the following screen will appear.

fig.09-37.eps

To erase the currently loaded image, and load the new image

1. Touch .

To cancel image loading

1. Touch .

If the image cannot be loaded, the following screen will appear.

fig.09-38.eps

Display Description

0103 Images stored in internal memory For numbers at which no image is saved, (Blank) is shown.

View The image stored in the ATELIER will be shown for a few seconds, allowing you to check the image.

Load... Load an image from external media into internal memory.

Clear... Delete an image from internal memory.

NOTE

NOTE

221

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 222

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. In the System screen, touch . fig.00-38.eps

3. Touch . fig.09-32.eps

The BMP Installer screen appears. fig.09-34.eps

4. In the screen, touch <01><03> to select the image that you wish to delete.

You can touch to verify the image.

Numbers for which (Blank) is shown have no image.

5. Touch . The following screen appears.

fig.09-39.eps

To cancel without deleting the image, touch .

6. Touch . The image will be deleted.

Once the image has been deleted, the screen will indicate (Blank.)

Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory

222

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 223

All songs and Registration data saved on a floppy disk can be copied to USB memory.

Rhythms and image data cannot be copied.

Songs and Registrations inside folders will not be copied. If you want to copy this data, move the song or Registration data out of the folder.

1. Make preparations for the copy. Connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Memory connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert the floppy disk containing the data you want to copy. Connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. In the System screen, touch . fig.00-38.eps

4. Touch . The following screen appears.

If you decide to stop the data copy operation, touch .

5. Touch . A screen like the one below appears, allowing you to specify a name for the folder.

If youre copying all songs and Registrations to USB memory, a folder will be created in the USB memory, and the data will be saved in this folder.

6. Touch the character select button ( ) to switch among uppercase/numbers. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase numbers uppercase...

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

To cancel the operation, touch .

8. When youre done making the settings, touch . The folder name has been assigned. The following screen appears.

Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory

NOTE

NOTE

Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Symbols _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Deletes a character.

Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

223

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 224

9. Touch . The data from floppy disk will be copied to USB memory. When the copy is completed, a message will indicate Completed, and you will return to the System screen.

If the floppy disk drive or USB memory is not connected correctly, a screen like the following will appear.

fig.++-+++

You can specify how transitions between images are to occur when you play back a slide show (p. 236).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch . fig.00-38.eps

3. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

4. Touch . The Video Option screen appears.

NOTE

Video-related Settings

Selecting the Type of Slide Show

224

Various Other Settings

V arious O

ther S ettings

AT-500_e.book 225

5. Touch the Slide Show Type setting.

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

7. Touch .

You can specify the interval at which images will change when you play back a slide show (p. 236).

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch . fig.00-38.eps

3. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

4. Touch . The Video Option screen appears.

Setting Description

SIMPLE One photo will simply fade-out while the next photo fades-in.

BLOCK The photo will be divided into blocks that change separately.

POP The photo will switch using rapid movement and color combination.

MIX Simple, block, and pop types will be combined.

Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change

225

Various Other Settings

AT-500_e.book 226

5. Touch the Slide Show Interval setting.

6. Touch < > < > to change the setting.

7. Touch .

Setting

5 SECONDS, 8 SECONDS, 12 SECONDS, 4 MEASURES, 6 MEASURES, 8 MEASURES

226

AT-500_e.book 227

Connecting with External Device

C onnecting w

ith E xternal D

evice

The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.

1. Output Main L/Mono, R Jacks These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound.

2. Input L/Mono, R Jacks Using these jacks, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the ATELIERs speaker.

3. RGB Out Connector p. 232 You can connect an external display here to view a slideshow.

4. Phones Jacks p. 23 Connect headphones here.

5. Mic Volume Knob p. 23 This adjusts the volume when a microphone is connected.

6. Mic Jack p. 23 Connect microphone here.

7. MIDI Out/In Connectors p. 231 You can connect external MIDI devices to the ATELIER and exchange performance data between them.

8. USB Connector p. 229 Used for connecting a computer to the ATELIER using a USB cable.

Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors

1 2 3

4 5 6 87

227

Connecting with External Device

AT-500_e.book 228

You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the ATELIER through the speakers of your audio system, or to record your performance on a tape recorder or other recording device.

When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold separately).

Connecting Speakers to the ATELIER and Outputting Sounds

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker youre about to connect.

2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the speaker.

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.

4. Switch on the ATELIER.

5. Switch on the connected speaker.

6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected speaker. When you play the ATELIERs keyboard, the sound is played from the connected speakers.

Turning Off the Power

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker youre about to connect.

2. Turn off the connected speaker.

3. Turn off the ATELIER.

Connecting to Audio Equipment

* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the input jacks may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.

921

* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

Input (Line In) jack

228

Connecting with External Device

C onnecting w

ith E xternal D

evice

AT-500_e.book 229

Playing Sounds from Audio Equipment Through the ATELIER

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device youre about to connect.

2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the audio device.

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.

4. Switch on the audio device.

5. Switch on the ATELIER.

6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the audio device. The sounds from the connected audio device are played by the ATELIER.

Turning Off the Power

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device youre about to connect.

2. Turn off the ATELIER.

3. Turn off the audio device.

The following become possible once you connect a USB cable (available separately) between the USB connector located to the lower left of the ATELIER and the USB connector of your computer.

You can use the ATELIER to play sounds from SMF music files played back with MIDI software.

By exchanging MIDI data with sequencer software, you can save songs recorded with the ATELIER to your computer, and enjoy a variety of musical control and editing features.

Connect the ATELIER to your computer as shown below.

* Refer to the Roland website for system requirements. Roland website: http://www.roland.com/

Stereo Set etc. Output (Line Out) jack

Connecting a Computer

USB Connector

USB Cable

Computer

229

Connecting with External Device

AT-500_e.book 230

If connection to your computer is unsuccessful...

Normally, you dont need to install a driver in order to connect the ATELIER to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the problem. Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver. For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver, refer to the Roland website.

Roland website: http://www.roland.com/

Specify the USB driver you want to use for ATELIER, and then install the driver.

1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch < > < > to display the USB Driver. fig.10-12.eps

3. Touch the USB Driver setting to switch between GENERIC and ORIGINAL. Each time you touch the USB Driver setting, it will alternate between GENERIC and ORIGINAL.

4. Turn the ATELIERs volume to the minimum level, switch off the power, then turn it back on again.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Caution

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.

USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase.

Turn on the power to the ATELIER before starting up MIDI applications on the computer. Do not turn the ATELIER on or off while any MIDI application is running.

Making the Settings for the USB Driver

Setting Description

GENERIC

Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer. Normally, you should use this mode.

ORIGINAL Choose this if you want to use a USB driver downloaded from the Roland website.

230

Connecting with External Device

C onnecting w

ith E xternal D

evice

AT-500_e.book 231

By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data, you can control the performances on one device from the other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.

Whats MIDI?

MIDI, short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, was developed as a standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers. The ATELIER is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These connectors can be used to connect the ATELIER to an external device for even greater versatility.

About MIDI Connectors

The ATELIER has two kinds of MIDI connectors. Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch tones on the other instrument. You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed. fig.10-09.eps

MIDI Out Connector Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data, data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

MIDI In Connector Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here. These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices.

The ATELIER contains two sound generators: one sound generator for its own keyboards and one GM2/GS sound generator (p. 252). Normally, musical data transmitted from an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the GM2/GS sound generator, but you can also set the MIDI IN Mode parameter (p. 212) so that the keyboard sound generator is controlled.

Making the Connections

When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the device youre about to connect.

2. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the device youre about to connect.

3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI connectors to each other.

4. Switch on the power to the ATELIER and the connected device.

5. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected device.

6. You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed (p. 213).

Connecting MIDI Devices

NOTE

231

Connecting with External Device

AT-500_e.book 232

Connecting an External Display

Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument

In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument. However, before you connect any monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:

Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the display.

Making the Connections 921

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

1. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the display to be connected (p. 22).

2. Connect your display to the ATELIER. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the display to the RGB Out connector on the ATELIER.

3. Switch on the ATELIER (p. 22).

4. Switch on the connected display.

For more on handling the external display, refer to your displays owners manual.

Connecting an External Display

External Display

Display Cable (commercial available)

Resolution 800 x 480 pixels

Horizontal scan frequency 31.5 kHz

Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz

Connector 3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type

Signal Analog

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

232

AT-500_e.book 233

Enjoying Music and Video

E njoying M

usic and V ideo

You can connect an external display to the ATELIER, and use it to view images from a device connected to the ATELIER.

You can also connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.

VIMA TUNES Screen

In the System Utility screen, touch to access the VIMA TUNES screen shown below.

You can also access the VIMA TUNES screen from the Rec/ Play screen(p. 153).

Mute the melody portion, or reduce the volume.

Sounds appropriate for the currently playing VIMA TUNES song will be selected automatically.

Change the key of the song thats playing

VIMA TUNES

VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the VIMA TUNES logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.

233

Enjoying Music and Video

AT-500_e.book 234

You can connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch .

4. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

5. Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.

Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs

Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song

If you want to use a CD or the CD drive, refer to Using a CD (p. 28).

You can also press the panels [Song] button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song Select screen.

NOTE

It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.

234

Enjoying Music and Video

E njoying M

usic and V ideo

AT-500_e.book 235

6. Touch < > to start playing back the song.

You can touch Playback Transpose < > < > to change the key of the song.

When you touch Melody in the screen, the melody will be muted.

You can mute the melody, and play the melody yourself.

When you touch Melody in the screen, the volume of the melody will be lowered. You can leave the melody playing at a lowered volume and play along until youve learned the melody. Since you will still be able to hear the melody, you can use it as a guide during practice.

7. Touch < > to stop playing back the song.

235

Enjoying Music and Video

AT-500_e.book 236

While playing back a VIMA CD-ROM (VIMA TUNES), you can view a slide show of images that match the mood of the song.

Songs on a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES) contain slide show images suitable for those songs, making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to prepare your own images (photos).

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.

2. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch .

4. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

5. Touch so its lit.

Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays

You can also press the panels [Song] button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song Select screen.

236

Enjoying Music and Video

E njoying M

usic and V ideo

AT-500_e.book 237

6. Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.

7. Touch < > to start playing back the song. A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the external display connected to the ATELIER.

8. Touch < > to stop playing back the song.

Viewing the ATELIERs screen to check the image thats shown on your external display

You can view the ATELIERs screen to check the image thats shown on your external display.

1. Press the [Video Monitor] button, getting its indicator to light up. The [Video Monitor] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.

fig.01-32_AT-900.eps

The ATELIERs display will show the same image as shown on your external display.

NOTE

It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.

237

Enjoying Music and Video

AT-500_e.book 238

When playing along on keyboard while listening to a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA TUNES), this function lets you play on Upeer keyboard using instrumental sounds that are appropriate for the atmosphere of the selected song. If you select a song from a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES), three recommended tones will automatically be selected in the VIMA TUNES screen. You can use these three sounds to perform sounds that will match the character of that song.

When you want to select a song from a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA TUNES), insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive.

1. Select the song of VIMA CD-ROM (p. 239).

2. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch .

4. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

The three recommended tones are shown in the lower part of the screen.

5. Touch one of the recommended tones in the screen to select a tone.

6. Touch < > to start playing back the song.

7. Play along with the song. The tones you play will be suitable for the character of the song.

8. Touch < > to stop playing back the song.

Performing with Sounds that Match the Song (Recommended Tones)

238

Enjoying Music and Video

E njoying M

usic and V ideo

AT-500_e.book 239

You can connect a CD drive to the ATELIER and use it to play music CDs. This lets you perform or sing along with the backing of a music CD.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the music CD into the CD drive.

2. Press the [Song] button. The Song Select screen appears.

3. Touch < > < > to select the CD.

4. Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.

5. Touch < > ( ) to start playing back the song.

6. Touch < > ( ) to stop playing back the song.

Listening to Songs from Music CD

NOTE

You cant copy music CD songs to Favorites.

If you want to use a CD or the CD drive, refer to Using a CD (p. 28).

NOTE

It will take a certain amount of time until a music CD can be selected.

NOTE

You can also play or stop the music data by touching or in the Rec/Play screen, and you can touch or to rewind or fast-forward the playback.

239

Enjoying Music and Video

AT-500_e.book 240

You can minimize the vocal sounds of a commercially available music CD, and sing the vocal part yourself. This is a convenient way to enjoy karaoke or practice soloing with a favorite music CD.

1. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector.

2. Insert the music CD you want to use into the CD drive, and select the song you want to sing (p. 239).

3. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch .

5. Touch . The VIMA TUNES screen appears.

6. Touch the Melody on the screen. The Center Cancel function is active.

7. Touch < > to start playing back the song. When you play back the song, the sound of the melody or vocal will be minimized.

This lets you perform the melody portion yourself.

Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing

You can transpose the song to a key that is more comfortable for you to sing.

If you or someone else will be singing along with a song, you can change the key of the song so its appropriate for the singers range.

1. Touch Playback Transpose < > < > on the VIMA Tunes screen. Each time you touch Playback Transpose < > < >, the key is changed by one semitone.

Touch < > to lower the key, or touch < > to raise the key.

This can be set in a range of -60+5 (semitone steps).

The VIMA TUNES screen shows the value youve specified.

2. If you touch Playback Transpose < > < > to select 0, Key Control will be turned off.

Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel) NOTE

For some songs, the vocal sound may not be eliminated completely.

NOTE

If you select a different song, the playback transpose settings will return to their factory-set state.

240

AT-500_e.book 241

Troubleshooting

T roubleshooting

A p

p en

d ices

If the ATELIER does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. If this does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.

Power does not Turn On

Problem Check Solution Page

When you press the [Power On] switch, the power doesnt come on

Power cord is not connected correctly. Connect the power cord correctly. p. 21

Problems with the Screen Display

Problem Check Solution Page

Nothing appears on screen

The ATELIER uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

It appears as though there are vertical stripes in the screen

This is due to the nature of a liquid crystal display, and is not a malfunction.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Cant view the main screen The [Video Monitor] button is lit.

If the [Video Monitor] button is lit, the ATELIERs display will show the same image as the device connected to the ATELIER. Press the [Video Monitor] button so its turned off.

p. 237

Bouncing Ball is not shown The Bouncing Ball display is turned off. Turn the Main Bouncing Ball setting ON. p. 214

Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display

With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

A button was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display. During the display of lyrics, you could be taken to a different screen if you press a button.

If you want to have the lyrics be displayed again, touch on the Rec/Play screen.

p. 206

Notation is not indicated properly in the display

In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

The Notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.

This is not a malfunction. p. 162

If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation.

Change the part that is displayed. p. 161

241

Troubleshooting

AT-500_e.book 242

No Sound is Heard

Problem Check Solution Page

No sound is heard

The [Master Volume] slider is set too low.

Turn the [Master Volume] knob toward Max.

p. 22

Headphones are connected. When you connect the headphones, the sound is heard only through the headphones.

If you want sound to be output from the speakers, disconnect the headphones.

p. 23

The plug is still plugged into the headphone jack.

Disconnect the plug from the headphone jack.

p. 23

The volume is set too low on the Level [] [] buttons.

Press the Level [][] buttons to raise the volume.

p. 62

The volume is set too low on the Expression Pedal.

Advance the expression pedal. p. 123

You do not have a Voice selected. Press a voice button to select a voice. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.

p. 47

Lower keyboard cannot be heard

Drums/SFX are selected for the Lower keyboard, but you are playing a key to which no drum sound is assigned.

Turn the Drums/SFX off or play keys to which drums sounds are assigned.

p. 66

The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being played.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Upper keyboard cannot be heard

Percussion Set 3 has been selected for the Upper keyboard. When Percussion Set 3 is selected, some keys may have no sound assigned to them.

For the upper keyboard, select a voice other than Percussion Set 3.

p. 48

No sound is heard (when external devices are connected)

The power of the connected external devices is not turned on.

Use the correct procedure to turn on the power of the connected external devices.

p. 228

p. 231

There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard

The V-LINK function is set Mode 2. When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images. Therefore, no sounds are played even when you press these keys.

Turn the V-LINK function off, or select Mode 1 for the V-LINK function.

p. 215

242

Troubleshooting

T roubleshooting

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 243

Problems with the Sound

Problem Check Solution Page

Noise is heard in the sound

If there is a cell phone nearby, you may hear noise from the ATELIER when an incoming call or outgoing call occurs, or during a conversation.

Keep the phone as far away as possible, or turn off its power.

- - -

When the human voice Jazz Scat is selected, playing dynamics do not change the sound

Initial Touch is set to OFF. Set Initial Touch to ON. p. 198

When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard, the notes continue sounding

The Lower Voice Hold is at ON. Turn Lower Voice Hold off. p. 70

Sound is produced when you take your finger off a key

You have selected a Marimba Treml or Banjo Treml sound. If you select a Marimba Treml or Banjo Treml sound, a sound will also be produced when you take your finger off the key.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Some keys (of certain keyboard parts) sound strange

You are playing notes outside the recommended range of the voice.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Bass is heard even though you are not playing the Bass Pedalboard

The Pedal [To Lower] button or the Bass Split is at ON. When the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Bass will be sounded by the Lower keyboard.

In the Pedal part, press the Pedal [To Lower] button or set Bass Split to OFF.

p. 149 p. 152

When playing the same sound in the Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard, the volume is different

The Initial Touch setting is different between the upper keyboard and lower keyboard.

Set Initial Touch to the same setting for both the upper keyboard and lower keyboard.

p. 198

The sound is not played correctly

If you layer the same type of sound (for example, Strings 1 and Strings 5), or play an octave-shifted organ sound, the timing at which you play a note or the phase relationship between the two sounds may affect the way in which the sounds are heard, but this is not a malfunction.

You are layering sounds of the same type (e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5). Alternatively, you are playing an organ sound with Octave Shift. This is not a malfunction.

- - -

Even though you press only one key, a multiple number of notes sound

Harmony Intelligence is at ON. Set Harmony Intelligence to OFF. p. 125

Chord Intelligence is set to ON. Set Chord Intelligence to OFF. p. 80

Pitch is off

Transpose is in effect.

Simultaneously press the Transpose [-] [+] buttons to cancel the transposition (the Transpose [-][+] buttons indicators will go out).

p. 117

The tuning is incorrect. Adjust the standard pitch. p. 210

While set for an octave shift, you are playing keys beyond the recommended range. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Adjust the Octave Shift setting. p. 64

Rotary effect is not be applied Some sounds do not allow the rotary effect to be applied.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

243

Troubleshooting

AT-500_e.book 244

Chorus effect does not apply Some sounds do not allow the chorus effect to be applied.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Sound is distorted/cracked

The Part Balance volume of each part is too high.

Press the Part Balance button to lower the volume.

p. 62

The Reverb volume has been raised when the volume of each Part Balance button is already raised.

Either lower the Reverb volume, or adjust the Part Balance of each part.

p. 62 p. 136

The [Master Volume] slider has been used to raise the overall volume excessively.

Use the [Master Volume] slider to lower the overall volume.

p. 22

The Bass Range Sounds Odd, or There Is a Vibrating Resonance

When listening through speakers: Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the ATELIER to resonate. Resonance can also occur with fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes.

Use the following measures to suppress such resonance. Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm

from walls and other surfaces. Reduce the volume. Move the speakers away from any

resonating objects.

- - -

When listening through headphones: Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the ATELIER) would be suspect.

Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center.

- - -

The volume level of the instrument connected to ATELIER is too low.

Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?

Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.

p. 228

Pressing the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data produces a crackling noise

The expression pedal function is set to PEDAL+COMPOSER during playback of ATELIER performance data. When this setting is used, moving the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal, which can result in this kind of sound being produced.

Set the expression pedal function to PEDAL during playback.

p. 200

Registrations do not Switch Correctly

Problem Check Solution Page

The Rhythm or Tempo does not change when you press the Registration buttons

The settings at which Registrations are recalled (Registration Arranger Update) has been set to DELAYED.

Set the timing at which the arranger settings are called up (Registration Arranger Update) to INSTANT.

p. 99 p. 205

Problem Check Solution Page

244

Troubleshooting

T roubleshooting

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 245

Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment does not Sound Right

Problem Check Solution Page

When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard while Automatic Accompaniment and Rhythm are playing, the Rhythm performance only remains playing

Chord Hold is set to OFF.

Set Chord Hold to ON. The Automatic Accompaniment will play while you press a chord. If Chord Hold is turned ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing with the Rhythm even when you take your hand off of the Lower keyboard.

p. 202

Rhythm sounds odd

When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance may not be sounded correctly.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

The bass note of the Automatic Accompaniment does not sound

When a voice is selected for the Pedal Bass part, the bass of the Automatic Accompaniment will not sound.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

When you started a Rhythm with an Intro, the Rhythm did not sound.

Some Rhythms do not have Rhythm sounds in the intro. This is not a malfunction. - - -

Cant use Chord Intelligence function

Chord Intelligence is set to OFF. Set Chord Intelligence to ON. p. 80

Tempo not changing even when the source tempo is reselected (when arranging Rhythms using the Rhythm Customize function)

Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo) is set to OFF. When the Auto Std Tempo setting is set to ON and Rhythms are switched while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo is automatically set to the tempo for that Rhythm. The tempo setting does not change automatically, even if the Rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to OFF and the Rhythm stopped.

Set Auto Std Tempo to ON. p. 203

Automatic Accompaniment sounds odd

The keys for a chord were not pressed simultaneously.

Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.

p. 80

When Chord Intelligence is OFF, the chord is not being pressed correctly.

Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.

p. 80

When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Automatic Accompaniment may not be sounded correctly.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

245

Troubleshooting

AT-500_e.book 246

-

-

Song does not Play Correctly

Problem Check Solution Page

The volume changes during playback of performance data

When recording is performed repeatedly while changing the Part Balance volume, the previously- recorded Part Balance data remains in the Control track.

If you wish to get rid of the volume changes, use the Erase function to delete the Part Balance data.

p. 182

Certain instrument are not heard while playing a song

The track is muted. Turn off track muting. p. 157 p. 159

Recording is not Possible

Problem Check Solution Page

Recording is not possible (If you wish to erase a previously- recorded track and then re- record.)

Press the track button for the desired track to make that button blink before you begin recording.

Press the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.

p. 166

Touch the track button for the track you want to record in the Rec/Play screen, stopping the button from flashing.

On Rec/Play screen, touch the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.

p. 166

The recorded performance has disappeared

Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the unit is turned off.

It is not possible to recover performance data that has been lost. Before you turn off the power, save the performance data in the Favorites (user memory), USB memory, or a floppy disk.

p. 169

Problems with Playback Functions

Problem Check Solution Page

Moving your hand over the D Beam controller does not produce a sound

If a D Beam button is lit in red, moving your hand above the D Beam controller will apply an effect to the sound you play from the keyboard.

Press the D Beam button once again so the button is lit in green.

p. 142

Expression Pedal does not operate

The function of the Expression Pedal during recording or the function during playback has been set to COMPOSER.

Set the expression pedal function during recording to PEDAL, and during playback to PEDAL or PEDAL+COMPOSER.

p. 199

Cant use the function assigned to the foot switch

If Registration Shift (change Registrations) is RIGHT, LEFT, or RIGHT + Load Next, the foot switch will be dedicated to switching the Registration.

Set Registration Shift to OFF. p. 122

246

Troubleshooting

T roubleshooting

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 247

Damper Pedal does not operate

The damper pedal affects only the Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard. The damper pedal does not affect the Bass pedalboard.

You can change the settings so that the damper pedal affects the Upper keyboard.

p. 200

The damper pedal does not affect the Solo voice.

This is not a malfunction. - - -

Other Problems

Problem Check Solution Page

Cant read/write USB memory Could you be using USB memory not made by Roland?

We cannot guarantee operation if youre using USB memory not made by Roland.

- - -

The Touch Screen doesnt respond correctly

The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used.

Reposition the Touch screen. p. 217

Unable to save created Rhythm to the User Memory

Memory Full appears in the display. The available memory remaining in the ATELIER is not sufficient.

First delete some other Rhythm saved to the user memory, then save the Rhythm you have created to the user memory once again.

p. 196 p. 197

Problem Check Solution Page

247

24

AT-500_e.book 248

Error Message

Error Message Meanings

Copy Protected. Cant Save. To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format.

Write-Protected Media. The protect tab of the storage media is set to the Protect (write prohibit) position. Move the tab to the Write (write permit) position and try the operation again.

Cant Save This Song. You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a storage media.

Master Disk This storage media does not allow initialization or saving. Insert a different storage media and try the operation again.

Read Only File. You cannot overwrite-save or delete a file on this storage media.

No Media Storage media is not connected. Please connect storage media.

Media Full Saving is not possible because the storage media does not have enough space. Please use other storage media that has been formatted by the ATELIER.

Unknown Media This storage media cannot be used. Please format it.

Media Ejected The storage media was disconnected while it was being accessed. Please try the operation again.

Damaged Media A damaged area was found on the storage media.

Cant Read This data cannot be read.

Cant Play Playback was halted because the song could not be read fast enough. The song could not be read from the storage media fast enough for playback. Press the [Reset] button, then press the [Play/Stop] button once again.

No Rhythm There is no Rhythm in user memory.

The Rhythm used by the selected Registration was deleted from user memory, or its order was changed.

Designated positions are incorrect.

When calibrating the touch panel, the appropriate point was not touched correctly. If you touch a location other than the specified point, the discrepancy may become severe. Please be sure to touch the correct point.

Memory Full

The song data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.

The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.

Recording or editing is not possible because the memory of the ATELIER is full.

MIDI Buffer Full The ATELIER cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the ATELIER.

Communication Error

A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely.

The ATELIER is unable to handle the data that was sent. Please send data that the ATELIER is able to handle.

A MIDI transmission error has occurred. Data transfer failed. Please transfer the data again.

Memory Error An error occurred in internal memory. Please perform the operation again. If this indication appears even after youve repeated the operation several times, please contact Roland service.

Not found A Rhythm or Registration that meets the conditions was not found.

This is Registration data of a type that is not supported. This instrument cannot use this Registration.

The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.

USB memory not supported by the ATELIER was connected. This USB memory cannot be used with the ATELIER.

8

AT-500_e.book 249

Chord List

C hord List

A p

p en

d ices

symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord. symbol: Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the .

Chord 1.eps

Cm7 5

C C# D E E F

Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7

C7 C#7 D7 E 7 E7 F7

Cm C#m Dm E m Em Fm

Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7

Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim Fdim

Dm7 5 Em7 5

Caug C#aug Daug E aug Eaug Faug

Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 E sus4 Esus4 Fsus4

C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 E 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4

Fm7 5E m7 5C#m7 5

C6 C#6 D6 E 6 E6

Cm6 Dm6 Em6

F6

Fm6C#m6 E m6

249

Chord List

AT-500_e.book 250

symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord. symbol: Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the .

Chord 2.eps

F# G A A B B

F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bmaj7

F#7 G7 A 7 A7 B 7 B7

F#m Gm A m Am B m Bm

F#m7 Gm7 A m7 Am7 B m7 Bm7

F#dim Gdim A dim Adim B dim Bdim

Gm7 5 Am7 5 Bm7 5

F#aug Gaug A aug Aaug B aug Baug

F#sus4 Gsus4 A sus4 Asus4 B sus4 Bsus4

F#7sus4 G7sus4 A 7sus4 A7sus4 B 7sus4 B7sus4

B m7 5A m7 5F#m7 5

G6

Gm6

A6A 6 B6

Bm6

B 6

B m6Am6A m6

F#6

F#m6

250

AT-500_e.book 251

Glossary

G lossary

A p

p en

d ices

Arrangement

This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.

Automatic Accompaniment

Automatic Accompaniment is Automatic Accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify the chord.

Basic Chord

This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which are generally the following six types: major chords, minor chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5) chords, dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords.

Chord

Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously. Chords consisting of three notes are called triads, and are the most basic type of chord.

Chorus

An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound.

Ending

This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the ATELIER plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm.

Glide

An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal.

Intro

This is the introductory portion of an Automatic Accompaniment performance. When Automatic Accompaniment begins, the ATELIER can add an appropriate intro for each Rhythm.

Inversion

When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said to be in root position. In contrast, forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called inversions.

Mute

To silence a sound. The ATELIER provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded, so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.

Panel Settings

Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow.

Pitch Bend

An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch.

Registration

A set of data that specifies the state of the instrument when performing, including sounds and panel settings.

Reverb

An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall.

Root Note

The root note is the basis of a chord. All chords are built on a root note, which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters.

Rotary

An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation: fast or slow.

Sound Generator

This is the section that produces the sound. The ATELIER series uses a sound generator that is compatible with GM2/GS.

Split

A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area. The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the Split Point.

Sustain

An effect that adds a decay to each note. The ATELIER allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part, lower part, and pedal part.

Vibrato

An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch.

Voice

The ATELIER is able to produce the sounds of various instruments. These sounds are called Voices.

251

25

AT-500_e.book 252

Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use

What Are Music Files? Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a corresponding pitch is played, the force applied to the key played, and other such information. Performance data is transmitted to the ATELIER from music files saved in USB memory and CD-ROM, and played back without change as songs. This is different than a audio CD, since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to change tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.

Regarding Copyright Use of the internal songs and audio files for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.

Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on existing copyrighted material, such as commercially available SMF music files, such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other than personal enjoyment. Roland takes no responsibility for any copyright violation you may commit by creating such works.

The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files

VIMA TUNES VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the VIMA TUNES logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display or television, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.

* This device (the AT-500) is not able to display images on a television screen.

SMF Music Files SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc.

SMF with Lyrics SMF with Lyrics refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device (one bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.

The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

About the ATELIER Sound Generator The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

General MIDI The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.

General MIDI 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.

In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.

GS Format The GS Format is Rolands set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI, Rolands GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.

XGlite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

2

AT-500_e.book 253

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off

S ettings T

hat A re S

tored A fter the P

ow er Is T

urned O ff

A p

p en

d ices

Arranger Update Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo) D Beam Sensitivity Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) Lyrics Main Background Main Bouncing Ball Master Tune Metronome Sound Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode Registration Shift Rhythm Mode Rotary Color Rotary Speed Send PC Switch Trans. Update (Transpose Update) USB Driver Registration Name

Registration Name Registration Shift Arranger Update Trans. Update (Transpose Update) Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) Rhythm Mode

Reverb Type Reverb Depth Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF) Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF) Transpose [-] [+] buttons (Key Transpose) L Foot Switch Assignment (Left Foot Switch Assignment) R Foot Switch Assignment (Right Foot Switch Assignment) Damper Pedal (Damper Pedal Assignment) [Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF) Harmony Intelligence Type Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF) Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF) Bender/Vibrato Pitch Bend Range Pedal Bass Mode

Solo Mode Solo To Lower Mode Solo Split Point Bass Split ON/OFF Bass Split Point Sustain ON/OFF Sustain Length Tx MIDI Channel Initial Touch (Initial Touch Sensitivity) Vintage Organ Type VintageOrganVolume PC Number (Program Change Number) Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB) Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB) Wall Type The Voices assigned for each part Level [ ][ ] button (Part Balance Volume) The Reverb depth for each part The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) for each part The Octave shift settings for each part The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part [Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF) Drum/SFX Set [Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF) Manual Percussion Set Selected Rhythm [Intro/Ending] button (ON/OFF) [Sync Start] button (ON/OFF) Variation Chord Intelligence ON/OFF Chord Hold ON/OFF Leading Bass ON/OFF Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF) Lower Voice Hold ON/OFF Tempo setting Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part Volume of the Rhythm drum part Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part Volume of the Rhythm bass part Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off

Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons

Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons

253

254

MIDI Implementation Chart

Function...

Basic Channel

Mode

Note Number :

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Prog Change

System Exclusive

System Common

System Real Time

Aux Message

Notes

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Default

Changed

Default Messages Altered

True Voice

Note ON Note OFF

Key's Ch's

0, 32 1 5

6, 38 7

10 11 16 64 65 66 67 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 84 91 93

98, 99 100, 101

: True #

: Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune

: Clock : Commands

: All sound off : Reset all controllers : Local Control : All Notes OFF : Active Sense : Reset

1 (Solo) 2 (Pedal) 3 (Lower) 4 (Upper) 11 (Drums/SFX) 13 (Manual Percussion) 16 (Expression, PC, V-LINK)

116

x x

O x 8n v=64

24110

x x

O

O x x x O x O x O x x x x x x O x x x x x x x x

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

0127 **************

O

x x x

O O

x x x x O x

1 (Solo) 2 (Pedal) 3 (Lower) 4 (Upper) 11 (Drums/SFX) 13 (Manual Percussion) 16 (Expression) 116 (GM2/GS) X

Mode 3 Mode 3, 4 (M=1) * 10

O x

0127 0127

O O

O

O 0127

O

x x x

x x

O (120, 126, 127) O x O (123125) O x

Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression General purpose controller 1 (Glide) Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Resonance Release Time Attack Time Cut off Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Portamento control Effect1 depth Effect3 depth NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB

* 1 O x is selectable. * 2 O x is selectable by SysEx. (GS Part) * 3 Not received in the keyboard part * 4 Can be received in the keyboard part * 5 With MIDI IN Mode 2 * 6 With MIDI IN Mode 1

* 7 Received in GM2 mode * 8 Received in GS mode * 9 Received in General MIDI mode * 10 Recognize as M=1 even if M1. * 11 V-LINK

Roland Organ

Model AT-500

Date: Sep. 1, 2008 Version : 1.00MIDI Implementation Chart

**************

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes X : No

Program number 1128

*3, 7, 8 *2, 7, 8, 9 *2, 7, 8 *2, 7, 8, 9 *2, 7, 8, 9 *3, 7, 8, 9 *3, 7, 8, 9 *4 *3, 7, 8, 9 *3, 7, 8 *2, 7, 8 *2, 7, 8 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *2, 8 *3, 7, 8 *3, 7, 8 *3, 8 *2, 7, 8, 9

*5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *6

*2, 8 *2, 7, 8, 9

*3, 7, 8, 9

*7, 8 *7, 8

*7, 8, 9

*2, 7, 8, 9

*1

*1

*11

*11

*11

*1

*11

AT-500_e.book 254

AT-500_e.book 255

Demo Song List

D em

o S ong List

A p

p en

d ices

981a

* All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

982

* No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI Out connector.

Profile

Akio Sasaki After graduating from the Berklee College of Music in Boston as a principle, Akio has been active as a top jazz organ player in Japan. He performs live throughout the country, and also teaches at the Senzoku Gakuen College of Music and at the Kyoto Musical Academy. Additionally, he has published numerous arrangements, works of music theory, and music education books. In 2005 he released his own trios CD album Glide in Blue, receiving high praise not only from organ fans but also from many jazz fans. In 2007 he released his new album Fly by Night, and his musical career continues to expand.

Hector Olivera Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Oliveras expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the worlds most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ, the Roland ATELIER for which he continues to collaborate with its development.

Song Title Composer Player Copyright

Jazz Organ Akio Sasaki Akio Sasaki 2007 Roland Corporation

Donau Wellen Iosif Ivanovici Yuri Tachibana 2007 Roland Corporation

Greensleeves Traditional Yuri Tachibana 2004 Roland Corporation

Pop Organ Ralf Schink Ralf Schink 2004 Roland Corporation

Jazz Combo Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 2003 Roland Corporation

Slow Waltz Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 2003 Roland Corporation

Hawaiian Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 2003 Roland Corporation

Dixieland Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 2003 Roland Corporation

Soft Gospel Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 2001 Roland Corporation

Pipe Organ Hector Olivera Hector Olivera 1999 Roland Corporation

Orchestra Hector Olivera Hector Olivera 2001 Roland Corporation

Soprano W.A.Mozart Hector Olivera 2001 Roland Corporation

Tenor Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 1999 Roland Corporation

Jazz Scat Ric Iannone Ric Iannone 1999 Roland Corporation

255

Demo Song List

AT-500_e.book 256

Ralf Schink Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern, Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. A tremendously versatile and gifted musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralfs repertoire appeals to all age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada.

Ric Iannone Ric Iannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than 20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe, delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.

Yuri Tachibana Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the 11 PM TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres, including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores.

In 2002, King Records released Yuris album Organ Chat, all songs of which were performed and recorded using the Roland Organ Music ATELIER. The album was acclaimed for its unique arrangements and sure playing, prompting the release of Organ Chat 2 in 2005. Currently, her musical activities range beyond Japan to include the United States, Europe, China, and Southeast Asia, and she has appeared on numerous CDs from King Records and other record companies as a recording arranger.

256

AT-500_e.book 257

Short Cut List

S hort C

ut List A

p p

en d

ices

Quick Guide Function

Short Cut Screen/Setting

While the Quick Guide screen is displayed,

Expression Pedal Controller screen/Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)

[Bender/Vibrato] lever Controller screen/ Bender/Vibrato

Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard screen

Lower Keyboard Split Point screen

Pedalboard Pedalboard screen/Pedal Bass Mode

Left Foot Switch Right Foot Switch

Controller screen/ L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch) R Foot Switch (Right Foot Switch)

Damper Pedal Controller screen/Damper Pedal

[Solo To Lower] button Split Point screen

[Pedal Sustain] button Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length

Rotary [On/Off] button Effect screen/Rotary Color

Rotary [Slow/Fast] button Effect screen/Rotary Speed

[Count Down] button Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound

Upper Voice select buttons Solo Voice select buttons [Alternate] button

Upper Keyboard screen

Lower Voice select buttons [Alternate] button

Lower Keyboard screen

Pedal Voice select buttons Pedalboard screen

Registration [Write] button Registration Options screen/Arranger Update

[One Touch Program] button

Factory Reset screen

[Harmony Intelligence] buttons

Panel Reset screen

[Song] button Song Clear screen (If the performance data has never been saved to a USB memory or Favorites, the Song Clear screen appears.)

257

25

AT-500_e.book 258

Main Specifications

AT-500: MUSIC ATELIER

Keyboard

Upper 49 keys (C3C7)

Lower 64 keys (Waterfall keyboard, A1C7)

Pedal 20 keys (C2G3)

Initial Touch Upper, Lower (10 levels for each)

Sound Generator

Sound Generator Conforms to GENERAL MIDI Level 2, GENERAL MIDI System, GS and XGlite format

Max.Polyphony 128

Voice 250 Voices (Included 12 Active Expression Voices)

Upper Part Organ, Orchestral

Lower Part Organ, Orchestral

Solo Part Solo

Pedal Part Pedal

Vintage Organ Flute (with harmonic bars)

Rhythm

Rhythm 195 Rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations

User Rhythm 99 Rhythms

Rhythm Customize Pattern editing of the internal Rhythms (Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note)

Arranger Function Tempo, Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro, Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Auto Fill In, Variation (4 variations), One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo, Rhythm Mode

Music Assistant 250 titles x 4 variations

One Touch Program 195 Rhythms x 2 groups x 4 variations

Quick Registration 150 settings in 12 groups

Drums/SFX Sets 16 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set

Manual Percussion Sets 6 sets

Harmony Intelligence 18 types

Master Tuning 415.3 Hz466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)

Key Transpose -4+7 (in semitones)

Playback Transpose -6+5 (in semitones)

Effects Rotary Sound, Chorus, RSS Reverb, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide

Registration Registration 8 memories

Function Load Next, File Edit

8

Main Specifications

M ain S

pecifications

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 259

962a

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

Composer

Tracks 7 tracks

Note Storage Approx. 40,000 notes

Song Length Max. 999 measures

Tempo 20500

Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note

Recording Realtime (Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop)

Edit Function Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize

Score Display DigiScore (Expanded Display, Lyrics Display, Change of Part Displayed, Note Name Display, Change Clef)

File Storage

Media USB memory, floppy disk (in the case of using optional USB floppy disk drive FD-01A)

Save Format MUSIC ATELIER original format, SMF format 0

Songs Max. 99 songs for each folder

Rated Power Output 50 W+50 W

Speaker Tweeter 5 cm x 2

Full-range 25 cm x 2

Display Graphic 800 x 480 dots backlit color LCD with touch screen

Pedals, Switches Damper Pedal, Expression Pedal, Foot Switch: 2 pcs. (function assignable)

Connectors Audio Output Jacks (L/mono, R), Audio Input Jacks (L/mono, R), Video Output Jacks (Analog RGB), Phones Jacks (stereo) x 2, Mic Input Jack, MIDI Connectors (In, Out), USB Jack, External Memory Connector (USB Memory connector), Ext Drive Connector, AC Inlet,

Power Supply AC 117 V, 230 V, 240 V

Power Consumption 120 W

Finish Simulated Dark Walnut

Dimensions

Console (included Music Rest)

1,242 (W) x 653 (D) x 550 (H) mm 48-15/16 (W) x 25-3/4 (D) x 21-11/16 (H) inchess

Stand 1,235 (W) x 599 (D) x 755 (H) mm 48-5/8 (W) x 23-5/8 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches

Total 1,242 (W) x 653 (D) x 1,264 (H) mm 48-15/16 (W) x 25-3/4 (D) x 49-13/16 (H) inches

Weight

Console 58.5 kg / 129 lbs

Stand 49.5 kg / 110 lbs

Total 108 kg / 239 lbs

Accessories Music Rest, Screw for the Music Rest x 2, Knob Bolt x 2, Cord Hook, Panel Sheet, Power Cord, Owners Manual, Voice & Rhythm Guide

Options Bench, Stereo Headphones, USB Memory, USB Floppy Disk Drive (FD-01A), CD Drive Holder (DH- 01), Microphone

259

26

AT-500_e.book 260

Index

A Active Expression Voice ...................................... 59 AEx Voice ......................................................... 59 Alternate ........................................................... 47 Arrangement ................................................... 251 Arranger function ............................................... 78 Arranger Update .............................................. 205 Audio CD ........................................................ 239 Auto Standard Tempo ....................................... 203 Automatic Accompaniment .......................... 78, 251

B Basic Chord .................................................... 251 Bass Split ........................................................ 149 Bender/Vibrato ................................................ 200 BMP Installer .................................................... 220 Bouncing Ball .................................................... 29 Break .............................................................. 121 Brightness

Rotary Effect ................................................ 130 Brilliance ......................................................... 118

C Calibration

Touch Screen .............................................. 217 CD-DA ............................................................ 239 Chord ............................................................. 251 Chord Hold ..................................................... 202 Chord Intelligence .............................................. 80 Chord Name

Main Screen ................................................. 29 Chorus ............................................................ 251 Chorus Effect ................................................... 131 code hook ......................................................... 24 Composer ....................................................... 153 Computer ........................................................ 229 Connecting

Audio Equipment ......................................... 228 Computer ................................................... 229

Copying Measure ..................................................... 184 Performance Song ....................................... 177 Registration ......................................... 114, 116 Rhythm ................................................... 87, 89 Rhythms on Disks into User Memory ......... 87, 177

Correct Timing ................................................. 185 Count Down ...................................................... 78 Count Down Sound .......................................... 202 Count In .......................................................... 164 Count-In Recording ........................................... 176

D D Beam Controller ........................................... 141 D Beam Controller sensitivity ............................. 201 Damper Pedal ......................................... 118, 199 Decay ............................................................ 118 Delete

Graphic ..................................................... 222 Measure .................................................... 179 Performance Songs ...................................... 172 Registrations ............................................... 110 Rhythms Stored in User Memory ...................... 94 Track ......................................................... 180

Demo Song ....................................................... 33 Demo Song List ................................................ 255 Depth

Expression Pedal ......................................... 124 Disk Rhythm ...................................................... 86 Drums/SFX ....................................................... 66 Drums/SFX Sets ................................................. 67

E Editing ............................................................ 179

Performance Data ....................................... 179 Effects ............................................................ 125 Ending ........................................................... 251 Erase

Performance Song ....................................... 167 Erase Event ..................................................... 182 Exp. Curve ...................................................... 124 Exp. Src (Play) ................................................. 200 Exp. Src (Rec) .................................................. 199 Expression Pedal ............................................. 123

Function ..................................................... 199 External Display

Connecting ................................................. 232

F Factory Reset ..................................................... 24 Feet .................................................................. 54 File Edit ............................................ 44, 112, 114 Fill In

Auto ............................................................ 79 Break ........................................................... 79

Foot Switch ............................................. 120121 Format ............................................................ 220

G General MIDI .................................................. 252 General MIDI 2 ............................................... 252 Glide ..................................................... 121, 251 GS ................................................................. 252

0

Index

Index

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 261

GS Format ....................................................... 252

H Harmony Intelligence ........................................ 125 H-Bar Manual .................................................... 57 Headphones ...................................................... 23 Human Voice ..................................................... 60

I Initial Touch Sensitivity ...................................... 198 Input ............................................................... 227 Intro ............................................................... 251 Inversion ......................................................... 251

K Key Transpose ................................................. 117

L Leading Bass ............................................. 82, 121 Load

Individual Registration .................................. 107 Performance Songs ...................................... 171 Set of Registrations ...................................... 106

Loop Recording ................................................ 175 Lower Hold ........................................................ 70 Lower Voice ...................................................... 48 Lyrics .............................................................. 206

M Main .............................................................. 227 Main Screen ...................................................... 29

Background ................................................ 214 Bouncing Ball .............................................. 214

Manual Percussion ............................................. 68 Manual Percussion Sets ....................................... 69 Master Tune .................................................... 210 Master Volume ................................................... 22 Measure

Copy ......................................................... 184 Delete ........................................................ 179

Metronome ...................................................... 207 Metronome Beat .............................................. 208 Metronome Sound ............................................ 208 Metronome Volume .......................................... 207 Mic ................................................................ 227

jack ............................................................. 23 Mic Echo ........................................................ 211 Mic Volume ....................................................... 23 Microphone ....................................................... 23 MIDI ............................................................... 231 MIDI Devices

Connecting ................................................. 231 MIDI IN Mode ................................................. 212 MIDI In/Out .................................................... 227 Music Assistant .................................................. 37

Main Screen ................................................. 29 Music Assistant Search ....................................... 39 Music CD ............................................... 239240 Music Files ...................................................... 252 Mute .............................................................. 251

N Notation ......................................................... 160

O Octave Shift ...................................................... 64 One Touch Program ..................................... 8485

P Panel Reset ..................................................... 219 Panel Settings .................................................. 251 Part Balance ...................................................... 62 Part Balance Monitor .......................................... 63 PC Number ..................................................... 212 Pedal ............................................................... 49 Pedal Bass Voice ............................................... 49 Pedal To Lower ................................................ 152 PedalBass Mode .............................................. 198 Pedalboard Polyphony ..................................... 198 Percussion ......................................................... 56 Performance

Recommended Tones ................................... 238 Phones ........................................................... 227

jack ............................................................. 23 Pitch Bend ....................................................... 251 Pitch Bend Range ............................................. 201 Pitch Bend/Vibrato .......................................... 119 Playback Transpose ......................................... 206 Playing

Demo Song .................................................. 33 Performance Song ....................................... 164 Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk ...... 156 Rhythm ......................................................... 75

Power On ......................................................... 21 Produce a Sound Effect

D Beam Controller ....................................... 142 Punch-in Recording .......................................... 174

Q Quick Guide ..................................................... 41

Index menu .................................................. 42 Main Screen ................................................. 30

261

Index

AT-500_e.book 262

Quick Registration .............................................. 35 Main Screen ................................................. 29

R Rec/Play

Main Screen ................................................. 30 Recall

Registration ................................................... 98 Recommend Tone ............................................. 238 Recording ....................................................... 153

Each Part Separately .................................... 165 Performance ............................................... 163 Re-Recording ............................................... 166

Recording onto SMF ......................................... 173 Registration ..................................................... 251

Arranger Update ........................................... 99 Main Screen ................................................. 30 Recall ........................................................... 98 Rename ...................................................... 112 Storing Registrations ...................................... 97

Registration Shift .............................................. 122 Rename

Performance Song ....................................... 167 Registration ......................................... 101, 112 Saved Rhythms .............................................. 92

Re-Recording ................................................... 166 Reverb ............................................................ 251 Reverb Effect ................................................... 136

Depth of the Reverb ............................. 139140 Reverb Type ................................................ 137 Wall Type .................................................. 138

RGB ............................................................... 227 Rhythm .............................................................. 71

Count Down ................................................. 78 Customize .................................................. 187 fill-in ............................................................. 79 Main Screen ................................................. 29 One Touch Program ....................................... 85

Rhythm Mode .................................................. 203 Rotary ............................................................. 251 Rotary Effect ............................................ 121, 128

Rotary Color ............................................... 130 Rotary Speed .............................................. 129

S Saving

Performance Songs ...................................... 169 Registration Sets .......................................... 103 User Rhythms .............................................. 197

Search Rhythm ......................................................... 73

Send PC Switch ............................................... 211

Slide Show ..................................................... 224 SMF Format .................................................... 170 SMF Music Files ....................................... 156, 252 SMF with Lyrics ................................................ 252 Solo ................................................................. 50

Alternate ...................................................... 50 To Lower .................................................... 146

Solo Mode ...................................................... 147 Solo To Lower ................................................. 146 Solo Voice ........................................................ 50 Sort

Registration ................................................ 112 Sound Generator ..................................... 251252 Sound/KBD

Main Screen ................................................. 30 Split ............................................................... 251 Split Point

Bass Split Point ........................................... 151 Solo Split Point ............................................ 148

Sub-window ................................................ 3132 Sustain ........................................................... 251 Sustain Effect ................................................... 133

Sustain Length ............................................. 135 Sync Start ......................................................... 76 System

Main Screen ................................................. 30

T Tempo .............................................................. 77 Touch Screen .................................................... 29 Tr. Mute (Track Mute) ....................................... 159 Track

Delete ........................................................ 180 Track Button .................................................... 154 Track Mute ...................................................... 157 Track Mute button ............................................ 159 Transpose

Key Transpose ............................................ 117 Main Screen ................................................. 29 Playback Transpose ..................................... 206 Update ...................................................... 205

Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel) ................. 213 Type of Slide Show .......................................... 224

U Upper Voice ...................................................... 48 Upper/Lower .................................................... 47

Alternate ...................................................... 47 USB ....................................................... 227, 229 USB (MIDI) connector ....................................... 229 USB Driver ...................................................... 230 User Memory ............................................ 72, 218

262

Index

Index

A p

p en

d ices

AT-500_e.book 263

User Memory Reset .......................................... 218 User Rhythm .................................................... 187

Save .......................................................... 197

V VARIATION ..................................................... 121 Variation ........................................................... 79 Vibrato ........................................................... 251 VIMA TUNES ........................................... 234, 252 Voice ........................................................ 46, 251 Volume

Part Balance ................................................. 62

X XGlite ............................................................. 252

263

MEMO

AT-500_e.book 264

264

MEMO

AT-500_e.book 265

265

AT-500_e.book 266

As of Oct. 1, 2007 (ROLAND)

Information When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.

EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street, ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis, Cairo 11341, EGYPT TEL: (022)-418-5531

REUNION Maison FO - YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann, Chaudron - BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex, REUNION ISLAND TEL: (0262) 218-429

SOUTH AFRICA T.O.M.S. Sound & Music (Pty)Ltd. 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (011)417 3400

Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd. Royal Cape Park, Unit 24 Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800 Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (021) 799 4900

CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. 5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090, CHINA TEL: (021) 5580-0800

Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. (BEIJING OFFICE) 10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL: (010) 6426-5050

HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. Service Division 22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, HONG KONG TEL: 2415 0911

Parsons Music Ltd. 8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39 Chatham Road South, T.S.T, Kowloon, HONG KONG TEL: 2333 1863

INDIA Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. 411, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai-400011, INDIA TEL: (022) 2493 9051

INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama Jl. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL: (021) 6324170

KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho-Dong, Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA TEL: (02) 3486-8855

MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd. 45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39, Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA TEL: (03) 7805-3263

VIET NAM Suoi Nhac Company, Ltd 370 Cach Mang Thang Tam St. Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, VIET NAM TEL: 9316540

PHILIPPINES G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Makati, Metro Manila 1200, PHILIPPINES TEL: (02) 899 9801

SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE. LTD. 150 Sims Drive, SINGAPORE 387381 TEL: 6846-3676

TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TEL: (02) 2561 3339

THAILAND Theera Music Co. , Ltd. 100-108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem, New Road,Sumpantawongse, Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL: (02) 224-8821

AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty.,Ltd. 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West. NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA

For Australia Tel: (02) 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel: (09) 3098 715

ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S.A. Av.Santa Fe 2055 (1123) Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL: (011) 4508-2700

BARBADOS A&B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados TEL: (246)430-1100

BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda. Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL TEL: (011) 4615 5666

CHILE Comercial Fancy II S.A. Rut.: 96.919.420-1 Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor Santiago - Centro, CHILE TEL: (02) 688-9540

COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda. Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin, Colombia TEL: (574)3812529

COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, San Jose, COSTA RICA TEL: 258-0211

CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc. Orionweg 30 Curacao, Netherland Antilles TEL:(305)5926866

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No.3 Ens.La Esperilla Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic TEL:(809) 683 0305

ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil - Ecuador TEL:(593-4)2302364

EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II, Edificio No.4010 San Salvador, EL SALVADOR TEL: 262-0788

GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL:(502) 599-2888

HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V. BO.Paz Barahona 3 Ave.11 Calle S.O San Pedro Sula, Honduras TEL: (504) 553-2029

MARTINIQUE Musique & Son Z.I.Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 426860

Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 715222

MEXICO Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F. MEXICO TEL: (55) 5668-6699

NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D'Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago.#503 Managua, Nicaragua TEL: (505)277-2557

PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA TEL: 315-0101

PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL: (595) 21 492147

PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima - Peru TEL: (511) 4461388

TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W.I. TEL: (868) 638 6385

NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd. Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL: 2273 0074

POLAND ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O. UL. Gibraltarska 4. PL-03 664 Warszawa POLAND TEL: (022) 679 4419

PORTUGAL Roland Iberia, S.L. Portugal Office Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto 4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL TEL: 22 608 00 60

ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1, 535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA TEL: (266) 364 609

RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6 117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA TEL: (095) 981-4967

SLOVAKIA DAN Acoustic s.r.o. Povazsk 18. SK - 940 01 Nov Zmky TEL: (035) 6424 330

SPAIN Roland Iberia, S.L. Paseo Garca Faria, 33-35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL: 93 493 91 00

SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A/S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

SWITZERLAND Roland (Switzerland) AG Landstrasse 5, Postfach, CH-4452 Itingen, SWITZERLAND TEL: (061) 927-8383

UKRAINE EURHYTHMICS Ltd. P.O.Box: 37-a. Nedecey Str. 30 UA - 89600 Mukachevo, UKRAINE TEL: (03131) 414-40

UNITED KINGDOM Roland (U.K.) Ltd. Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (01792) 702701

BAHRAIN Moon Stores No.1231&1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931, Manama 339 BAHRAIN TEL: 17 813 942

IRAN MOCO INC. No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave., Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran, IRAN TEL: (021)-2285-4169

ISRAEL Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Ltd. 8 Retzif Ha'alia Hashnia St. Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL TEL: (03) 6823666

URUGUAY Todo Musica S.A. Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C.P.: 11.800 Montevideo, URUGUAY TEL: (02) 924-2335

VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro,C.A. Av.las industrias edf.Guitar import #7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas, Venezuela TEL: (212) 244-1122

AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Austrian Office Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8, A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

BELGIUM/FRANCE/ HOLLAND/ LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N.V. Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel (Westerlo) BELGIUM TEL: (014) 575811

CROATIA ART-CENTAR Degenova 3. HR - 10000 Zagreb TEL: (1) 466 8493

CZECH REP. CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o Voctrova 247/16 CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8, CZECH REP. TEL: (2) 830 20270

DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A/S Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL: 3916 6200

FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As, Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (0)9 68 24 020

GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt, GERMANY TEL: (040) 52 60090

GREECE/CYPRUS STOLLAS S.A. Music Sound Light 155, New National Road Patras 26442, GREECE TEL: 2610 435400

HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd. Warehouse Area DEPO Pf.83 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (23) 511011

IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park, Calmount Avenue, Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL: (01) 4294444

ITALY Roland Italy S. p. A. Viale delle Industrie 8, 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY TEL: (02) 937-78300

JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD. FREDDY FOR MUSIC P. O. Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL: (06) 5692696

KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI & SONS CO. Al-Yousifi Service Center P.O.Box 126 (Safat) 13002 KUWAIT TEL: 00 965 802929

LEBANON Chahine S.A.L. George Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16- 5857 Beirut, LEBANON TEL: (01) 20-1441

OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C. Malatan House No.1 Al Noor Street, Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL: 2478 3443

QATAR Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio & Stores) P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR TEL: 4423-554

SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Behind Pizza Inn Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building, PO BOX 2154, Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL: (03) 8643601

SYRIA Technical Light & Sound Center Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St. Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520, Damascus, SYRIA TEL: (011) 223-5384

TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S. Galip Dede Cad. No.37 Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY TEL: (0212) 249 85 10

U.A.E. Zak Electronics & Musical Instruments Co. L.L.C. Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg., No. 14, Ground Floor, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: (04) 3360715

CANADA Roland Canada Ltd. (Head Office) 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL: (604) 270 6626

Roland Canada Ltd. (Toronto Office) 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL: (905) 362 9707

U. S. A. Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938, U. S. A. TEL: (323) 890 3700

ASIA

AFRICA

AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND

EUROPE

CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA

MIDDLE EAST

NORTH AMERICA

AT-500_e.book 267

For EU Countries

For China

AT-500_e.book 268

This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.

For EU Countries

For Canada

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.

NOTICE

AVIS

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

WARNING This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.

For C.A. US (Proposition 65)

For the USA

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement

Model Name : Type of Equipment : Responsible Party :

Address : Telephone :

AT-500 Digital Organ Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938 (323) 890-3700

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the AT500 Roland works, you can view and download the Roland AT500 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Roland AT500 as well as other Roland manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Roland AT500. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Roland AT500 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Roland AT500 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Roland AT500 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Roland AT500 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Roland AT500 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.